Sony Stereo System 702P User Manual
DME SWITCHER  
DFS-700  
DFS-700P  
DIGITAL/ANALOG INPUT BOARD  
BKDF-701  
ANALOG COMPOSITE INPUT BOARD  
BKDF-702/702P  
DIGITAL MULTI EFFECTS BOARD  
BKDF-711  
3D VIDEO MAPPING EFFECTS BOARD  
BKDF-712  
SERVICE MANUAL  
Volume 1 1st Edition  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2-13. Fixtures/Measuring Instruments................................................................ 2-42  
2-13-1. Fixtures..................................................................................... 2-42  
2-13-2. How to Use Extension Board ................................................... 2-43  
2-13-3. Measuring Instruments ............................................................. 2-43  
3. Self-diagnosis  
3-1. Confirmation of Version ............................................................................. 3-2  
3-1-1. Execution.................................................................................... 3-2  
3-1-2. Viewing the Version .................................................................. 3-3  
3-2. Check Mode ................................................................................................ 3-3  
3-2-1. Activation and Termination ....................................................... 3-3  
3-2-2. Basic Operation .......................................................................... 3-4  
3-2-3. Checking .................................................................................... 3-5  
3-3. Troubleshooting .......................................................................................... 3-9  
4. Electrical Alignment  
4-1. Adjustment Sequence .................................................................................. 4-1  
4-2. Preparation for Adjustment ......................................................................... 4-4  
4-3. OPM-39/39P Board Adjustment ................................................................. 4-5  
4-3-1. +5 V DC Voltage Adjustment ................................................... 4-5  
4-3-2. +3.3 V DC Voltage Adjustment ................................................ 4-5  
4-3-3. SDI VCO Free-running Frequency Adjustment ........................ 4-6  
4-3-4. PGM OUT Component Y Gain Adjustment .............................. 4-7  
4-3-5. PGM OUT Component R-Y Gain Adjustment .......................... 4-8  
4-3-6. PGM OUT Component B-Y Gain Adjustment .......................... 4-9  
4-3-7. PGM OUT Component Y/C Delay Adjustment ...................... 4-10  
4-3-8. Composite SC Leak Balance Adjustment ................................ 4-11  
4-3-9. Composite Y Gain Adjustment ................................................ 4-12  
4-3-10. Composite Modulation AXIS Adjustment ............................... 4-13  
4-3-11. Composite Y/C Delay Adjustment........................................... 4-15  
4-3-12. Composite C Gain Adjustment ................................................ 4-16  
4-3-13. Composite Burst Balance Adjustment (For PAL only) ........... 4-18  
4-3-14. Composite Burst Level Adjustment ......................................... 4-19  
4-3-15. S VIDEO Y Gain Adjustment .................................................. 4-20  
4-3-16. S VIDEO C Gain Adjustment .................................................. 4-21  
4-3-17. Black Burst OUT SC Leak Balance Adjustment ..................... 4-22  
4-3-18. Black Burst OUT Burst Balance Adjustment  
(For PAL only) ......................................................................... 4-23  
4-3-19. Black Burst OUT SC Phase Adjustment.................................. 4-24  
4-3-20. Black Burst OUT SYNC Level Adjustment ............................ 4-26  
4-3-21. Black Burst OUT Burst Level Adjustment .............................. 4-27  
4-3-22. INT SC Frequency Adjustment................................................ 4-28  
4-3-23. INT SCH Phase Adjustment .................................................... 4-29  
DFS-700/700P  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4-3-24. INT Black Burst OUT SCH Phase Adjustment ....................... 4-31  
4-3-25. Preread ON PGM OUT SCH Phase Adjustment  
(For PAL only) .........................................................................4-33  
4-3-26. Preread ON PGM OUT Burst Start Adjustment  
(For PAL only) .........................................................................4-34  
4-3-27. GEN Lock H Phase Adjustment .............................................. 4-35  
4-3-28. GEN Lock SC Phase Adjustment ............................................4-36  
4-3-29. PVW OUT Video Gain Adjustment ........................................ 4-38  
4-3-30. DSK EXT Key Clamp Level Adjustment ................................4-39  
4-3-31. DSK EXT Key Gain Adjustment ............................................. 4-40  
4-4. IPM-96/96P Board Adjustment................................................................. 4-41  
4-4-1. SDI VCO Free-running Frequency Adjustment ...................... 4-41  
4-4-2. Component Y Level Adjustment ............................................. 4-42  
4-4-3. Component Chroma Level Adjustment ................................... 4-43  
4-4-4. Input Y/C Delay Adjustment ................................................... 4-45  
4-4-5. Video Input Phase Adjustment................................................. 4-46  
4-4-6. RGB Converted Y Level Adjustment ......................................4-47  
4-4-7. RGB Converted Chroma Level Adjustment ............................ 4-48  
4-5. VIF-19/19P Board Adjustment ................................................................. 4-50  
4-5-1. Composite Y Level Adjustment ............................................... 4-50  
4-5-2. S VIDEO Clamp DC Level Adjustment .................................. 4-52  
4-5-3. SYNC Separate Adjustment..................................................... 4-54  
4-5-4. H Lock Loop Adjustment......................................................... 4-55  
4-5-5. Burst Delay Adjustment ........................................................... 4-57  
4-5-6. Composite Input Y Gain Adjustment....................................... 4-59  
4-5-7. Composite Input Chroma Level Adjustment ........................... 4-61  
4-5-8. S VIDEO Input Gain Adjustment ............................................4-63  
4-5-9. Composite Input Y/C Delay Adjustment ................................. 4-65  
4-5-10. S VIDEO Input Y/C Delay Adjustment ................................... 4-69  
4-5-11. Video Input Phase Adjustment................................................. 4-73  
4-6. VIF-20/20P Board Adjustment ................................................................. 4-74  
4-6-1. SDI VCO Free-running Frequency Adjustment ...................... 4-74  
4-6-2. Component Y Level Adjustment ............................................. 4-75  
4-6-3. Component Chroma Level Adjustment ................................... 4-76  
4-6-4. Input Y/C Delay Adjustment ................................................... 4-78  
4-6-5. Video Input Phase Adjustment................................................. 4-79  
4-7. Adjusting the Power Supply Voltage ........................................................4-80  
DFS-700/700P  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Structure  
Purpose of this manual  
This manual is the service manual Vol.1 of the DME Switcher DFS-700/700P and  
their optional boards.  
The service manuals (Vol.1 and Vol.2) are intended for use by trained system and  
service engineers, and describes the information on installing, maintenance, and  
detailed service.  
This manual (Vol.1) describes the operating instructions, service overviews,  
diagnosis, and electrical alignment.  
Related manuals  
Besides this Service Manual Vol.1, the following manuals are available for the  
DFS-700/700P.  
. Service Manual Vol.2  
Part No. 9-967-898-01 (for J, UC, CE)  
Contains the spare parts, semiconductor pin assingments, block diagrams,  
schematic diagrams, and board layouts.  
. “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM (available on request)  
This “Semiconductor Pin Assignments” CD-ROM allows you to search for  
semiconductors used in Communication System Solutions Network Company equipment.  
Semiconductors that cannot be searched for on this CD-ROM are listed in the service  
manual for the corresponding unit. The service manual contains a complete list of all  
semiconductors and their ID Nos., and thus should be used together with the CD-ROM.  
Part number: 9-968-546-XX  
Contents  
This manual is organized by following sections.  
Section 1 Operating Instructions  
This section describes the Operation Manual supplied with the DFS-700/700P.  
Section 2 Service Overview  
This section explains the information that is required for installing (the operating  
conditions, power supply and power cords, installaion of the optional board, rack  
mounting, adaptive connectors), outline of the board circuit, replacement of the parts,  
switch setting on the board, error indication, and tools and adjustment equipment.  
Section 3 Self-diagnosis  
This section explains the activation (termination) of the check mode in this unit, the  
basic operation, and the check method.  
Section 4 Electrical Alignment  
This section explains the adjustment of the OPM-39, IPM-69, VIF-19,  
and VIF-20 boards.  
DFS-700/700P  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3-203-834-11(1)  
DME Switcher  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual  
thoroughly and retain it for future reference.  
DFS-700/700P  
2000 Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
For customers in the USA (DFS-700 only)  
Owner’s Record  
Chapter 1  
Overview  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with  
the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of  
the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the  
equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency  
energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential  
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the  
user will be required to correct the interference at his own  
expense.  
The model and serial numbers are located in the rear.  
Record these numbers in the spaces provided below. Refer  
to them whenever you call upon your Sony dealer regarding  
this product.  
Features of This System ................................................1-1  
Option Boards ................................................................1-3  
Model No.  
Serial No.  
Chapter 2  
Control Panel ................................................................. 2-1  
Processor Unit..............................................................2-13  
Front Panel ..................................................................... 2-13  
Rear Panel ...................................................................... 2-13  
Location and  
Function of Parts  
and Controls  
WARNING  
To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not  
expose the unit to rain or moisture.  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your authority  
to operate this equipment.  
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual  
must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the  
limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of  
FCC Rules.  
Chapter 3  
DME Switcher Introduction .......................................... 3-1  
Sequence of Operations.................................................... 3-1  
Example Operation (1): Wipe........................................... 3-2  
Example Operation (2): Picture-in-Picture ...................... 3-5  
Demonstration .................................................................. 3-8  
Using the Menus............................................................. 3-10  
Selecting Images......................................................... 3-12  
Background Image and Foreground Image .................... 3-12  
Selecting Signals Output to the Auxiliary Bus ............... 3-16  
Selecting an Effect .......................................................3-17  
Types of Effect ............................................................... 3-17  
Example Effects ............................................................. 3-18  
Selection in Direct Pattern Selection Mode ................... 3-23  
Selection in Pattern Number Specification Mode .......... 3-24  
Basic Operation  
Caution  
Television prograrms, films, video tapes and other materials  
may be copyrighted.  
Unauthorized recording of such material may be contrary to  
the provisions of the copyright laws.  
For the customers in Europe (DFS-700P only)  
This product with the CE marking complies with both the  
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and the Low Voltage Directive  
(73/23/EEC) issued by the Commission of the European  
Community.  
Compliance with these directives implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
• EN60950: Product Safety  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment, ex.  
TV studio).  
Modifying the Boundary — Border, Soft Edge,  
Beveled Edge, and Crop.....................................3-26  
Changing the Pattern Position and Size —  
Location (X)(Y)(Z)................................................3-29  
Modifying the Pattern — User Modifiable Effects .....3-31  
(Continued)  
2
Table of Contents  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Chapter 3  
Chapter 5  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key...3-33  
Luminance Key .............................................................. 3-33  
Chroma Keying .............................................................. 3-36  
Masking Part of a Title Key............................................ 3-44  
Control From the PVE-500............................................ 5-1  
Preparations ...................................................................... 5-2  
Cut Editing ....................................................................... 5-2  
A/B Roll Editing............................................................... 5-3  
Control From the BVE-600............................................ 5-5  
Preparations ...................................................................... 5-5  
A/B Roll Editing............................................................... 5-6  
Control From the BVE-900/2000 Series........................5-8  
Preparations ...................................................................... 5-9  
Notes on Operation......................................................... 5-10  
Control Using GPI Signals ......................................... 5-11  
Preparations .................................................................... 5-11  
A/B Roll Editing............................................................. 5-12  
Turning a Downstream Key On and Off ........................ 5-13  
Preread Editing.............................................................5-14  
Basic Operation  
(Continued)  
Control From  
Editing Control  
Units  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (2) —  
Downstream Key ................................................ 3-45  
Setting Up a Transition ................................................3-51  
Setting the Transition Time ............................................ 3-51  
Setting the Transition Direction ..................................... 3-52  
Executing an Effect ......................................................3-54  
Adjusting Color Mattes ................................................3-57  
Adjusting Image Colors — Color Correction.............3-59  
Freezing an Input Image — Frame Memory  
Function...............................................................3-61  
Fade-to-Black................................................................3-63  
Chapter 4  
Chapter 6  
Advanced  
Operations  
Changing Direct Pattern Assignments........................ 4-1  
User Program Effects ................................................... 4-3  
Constructing a User Program Effect ................................ 4-3  
Types of User Program Effect .......................................... 4-4  
Modification Parameters .................................................. 4-5  
Creating New User Program Effects .............................. 4-10  
Editing User Program Effects......................................... 4-12  
Executing User Program Effects .................................... 4-18  
Deleting All User Program Effects................................. 4-19  
Snapshots .....................................................................4-20  
Saving a Snapshot .......................................................... 4-21  
Recalling a Snapshot ...................................................... 4-22  
Snapshot Demonstration ................................................ 4-23  
Reinitializing the Snapshots ........................................... 4-24  
Basic System Connections .......................................... 6-2  
Key Signal Connections ................................................6-3  
System Connections for Preread Editing ................... 6-4  
Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System ..............6-5  
Setup Menu Settings......................................................6-7  
Setup Menu Organization................................................. 6-7  
System Setup (page 1/8)................................................... 6-7  
System Information Display (page 2/8) ........................... 6-8  
Input Video Setup (page 3/8)............................................ 6-8  
Output Video Setup (page 4/8) ......................................... 6-9  
Control Panel Setup (page 5/8) ...................................... 6-10  
Initializing User Settings (page 6/8)............................... 6-10  
Loading User Settings From Memory (page 7/8) .......... 6-10  
Saving User Settings in Memory (page 8/8) .................. 6-10  
System  
Connections  
and Settings  
4
Table of Contents  
Table of Contents  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Appendixes  
Chapter  
1
Warning Messages........................................................ A-1  
Effect Type List .............................................................. A-3  
Effect Control Parameter List....................................... A-5  
Effect Motion Types..................................................... A-21  
Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations ......... A-22  
Effect Pattern Image List ............................................ A-29  
To Exchange the Button Labels................................. A-63  
Specifications .............................................................. A-64  
Glossary....................................................................... A-66  
Overview  
Features of This System  
Index .................................................................................I-1  
The Sony DFS-700/700P DME Switcher is a Digital  
Multi Effects system, offering high-performance  
effects at high image quality. The system consists of a  
processor unit and control panel.  
Support for wide range of input/output  
signal formats  
• There are eight inputs as standard (VIDEO INPUT 1  
to 8).  
VIDEO INPUT 1 to 4: SDI (serial digital interface)  
signals  
VIDEO INPUT 5 to 8: analog component signals.  
VIDEO INPUT 8 can also be used as an analog  
RGB signal input.  
Installing the optional BKDF-701 board allows all  
eight inputs to be used as either SDI or analog  
component inputs.  
Support for fully digital component  
systems with SDI inputs and outputs  
This system provides SDI interfaces as standard  
equipment. This allows it to be incorporated in fully  
digital linear editing systems using DVCAM-series,  
Betacam SX-series, and other digital VCRs.  
Installing the optional BKDF-702/702P board allows  
four inputs to be used as either Y/C (S-video) or  
analog composite inputs.  
Advanced special effects  
This system is equipped with advanced special effects,  
including trail, lighting effects, ripple, swirl, and  
explosion.  
Installing the optional BKDF-711 board adds a second  
DME channel, and the optional BKDF-712 board  
enables 3D mapping effects to be used.  
For details of option boards, see page 1-3.  
• The standard outputs are two each of SDI, analog  
component, analog composite, and Y/C, for a total of  
eight outputs.  
For details of option boards, see page 1-3.  
Comprehensive title key functions  
Luminance keys, chroma keys, and downstream keys  
are all provided as standard functions.  
6
Table of Contents  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features of This System  
Color correction function  
Option Boards  
The DFS-700/700P system has the following option  
boards.  
Interfacing with editors  
BKDF-711 2nd Channel DME Board  
A YUV color correction function is provided for white  
balance adjustment and general color adjustment.  
This system is equipped with I/O interfaces for two  
sets of control signals, allowing operation together  
with various editing control units.  
• Nine-pin interface connector (one input/output):  
for A/B roll editing (two players, one recorder)  
together with a PVE-500, BVE-2000 series, or other  
editing control unit  
• GPI (General Purpose Interface) and trigger  
signal connectors (two inputs): for control from  
external equipment not fitted with the 9-pin interface  
This board provides a second DME channel, enabling  
two-picture box, two-picture brick, and other effects.  
BKDF-701 SDI and Component Input  
Board  
User program effect and snapshot  
function  
BKDF-712 3D Video Mapping Effects  
Board  
When this board is installed, it allows all eight video  
inputs to be used as either SDI or analog component  
inputs. When using this board, you can select the types  
of the optional inputs individually, using the setup  
menu.  
This board provides 3D mapping effects, including 3D  
page turn, 3D beveled edge, and other effects.  
• User program effects: This system has a large  
number of built-in effects, but also allows the user to  
create original effects, and save them in memory, for  
execution in the same way as the built-in effects. Up  
to twenty user program effect patterns, both linear  
and nonlinear, can be saved.  
• Snapshot function: The processor unit includes  
snapshot registers 0 to 99, each of which can hold a  
snapshot of the control panel settings. These can then  
be recalled as required.  
This system also supports the background through  
mode. If connected to a recorder VCR with a preread  
function, A/B roll editing with a minimum of two  
VCRs is possible. (In background through mode, the  
delay to the signal selected on the background bus of  
this system is 4H. Note that there are restrictions on  
the effect patterns that can be used for preread editing.)  
BKDF-702/702P Y/C and Composite Input  
Board  
When this board is installed, it allows four video  
inputs to be used as either Y/C (S-video) or analog  
composite inputs. When using this board, you can  
select the types of the optional inputs individually,  
using the setup menu.  
Aspect ratio selection  
External synchronizing connectors for  
higher editing precision  
In the setup menu it is possible to select either 4:3 or  
16:9 as the screen aspect ratio.  
The system is provided with black burst outputs for  
synchronizing other connected devices, and a genlock  
input for synchronization to an external signal. This  
allows more precise editing.  
Easy operation for live broadcasting  
The following features make this system suitable for  
live broadcasting from CATV studios and so on.  
• Fully-equipped control panel offers easy operability  
for signal selection and transition setting.  
• Parallel tally output and preview output supplied as  
standard  
Rack mounting  
The processor unit can be mounted in an EIA standard  
19-inch rack.  
1-2  
Chapter 1 Overview  
Chapter 1 Overview  
1-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
2
Location and Function  
of Parts and Controls  
Control Panel  
This section describes the control panel, which is  
divided into several sections, as shown below. See the  
page numbers shown in parenthesis for more details.  
Note  
If you make an error in operation, a warning sound  
may occur. You can switch off this audible warning  
(see page 6-10).  
6 EDITOR and GPI buttons (see page 2-7)  
7 Menu control section (see page 2-7)  
9 User program section (see page 2-11)  
8 Effect control section  
(see page 2-10)  
q; Snapshot section (see page 2-11)  
qs 25-pin  
connector (see  
page 2-12)  
qa Location section (see page 2-12)  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
TRANS RATE  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
FADE  
TO  
LAST  
X
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
5 Fade-to-black  
and DSK section  
(see page 2-6)  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
2 Primary cross-point bus section (see page 2-3)  
4 Pattern/numeric keypad (see page 2-5)  
3 Effect transition section (see page 2-4)  
1 Delegation section (see page 2-2)  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel  
1 Delegation section  
2 Primary cross-point bus section  
3 Frame memory buttons  
BACKGROUND  
1 BACKGROUND bus buttons  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
1 Delegation buttons  
CCR  
TITLE 1  
SOURCE SOURCE  
TITLE 2  
DSK SUPER BG FRGD 2 MEMORY FRAME  
FILL  
FREEZ  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
FOREGROUND  
2 FOREGROUND bus buttons  
INT  
VIDEO  
2 AUXILIARY buttons  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1 Delegation buttons  
2 AUXILIARY buttons  
1 BACKGROUND bus buttons  
2 FOREGROUND bus buttons  
Use these buttons to delegate the input signal  
Select the input signal to be assigned to the function  
selected with a delegation button.  
Select from the following buttons.  
BLACK button: Black burst signal generated by the  
internal synchronizing signal generator in this unit  
Buttons 1 to 8: Signals input to the VIDEO INPUT 1  
to 8 connectors on the rear panel of the processor  
unit. You can set the assignment of buttons to  
input connectors in the setup menu.  
MEMORY button: Signal recorded in frame  
memory  
INT (internal) VIDEO button: Signal generated by  
the internal video signal generator  
Select the image to form the background for an effect.  
Select from the following buttons.  
BLACK button: Select the black burst signal  
generated by the internal synchronizing signal  
generator in this unit.  
Buttons 1 to 8: Signals input to the VIDEO INPUT 1  
to 8 connectors on the rear panel of the processor  
unit. Press a button, turning it on, to select the  
corresponding signal.  
You can set the assignment of buttons to input  
connectors in the setup menu.  
Select the image to form the foreground for an effect  
(or the “new” video in a transition).  
The functions of the buttons are the same as in the  
BACKGROUND bus buttons.  
When the signal on the foreground bus is output from  
the PGM OUT connector on the rear panel of the  
processor unit, the button which has been pressed  
lights red. If the signal is not output, the button pressed  
lights amber.  
corresponding to the selected AUXILIARY button to  
the corresponding function. Pressing one of these  
buttons lights it, and the corresponding AUXILIARY  
button also lights. Any other previously lit delegation  
button goes off.  
CCR (color corrector) button: Signal for color  
correction  
TITLE 1 SOURCE button: Title 1 source signal for  
inserting characters and graphics using a title key  
TITLE 2 SOURCE button: Title 2 source signal for  
inserting characters and graphics using a title key  
(only available when the optional BKDF-711 2nd  
Channel DME Board is installed)  
DSK (downstream keyer) FILL button: Fill signal  
for the downstream keyer  
SUPER BG (background) button: Background  
image for 3D effects  
MEMORY button: Select the signal recorded in  
frame memory.  
INT (internal) VIDEO button: Select the internal  
video signal selected by pressing the MATTES  
button in the menu control section. If you hold  
down this button and press the DOWN and UP  
buttons in the pattern/numeric keypad, the  
selected video signal pattern changes.  
When the signal on the background bus is output from  
the PGM OUT connector on the rear panel of the  
processor unit, the button which has been pressed  
lights red.  
3 Frame memory buttons  
FREEZ button: To capture the input signal selected  
by the MEMORY button in the delegation buttons  
(excluding the frame memory output signal) as a  
freeze image in frame memory, press this button,  
turning it on.  
Press once more to end the freeze, turning it off.  
FRAME button: Select whether to capture a frame  
or a field with the FREEZ button. Press this  
button, turning it on, to freeze a frame; when the  
button is off a field is captured.  
FRGD (foreground) 2 button: One of the  
foreground images for 3D effects  
MEMORY button: Signal captured in frame  
memory  
When capturing fields, you can select in the setup  
menu whether to capture an odd or an even field.  
2-2  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel  
9 N/R (normal/reverse) button  
To carry out an effect in normal/reverse (i.e.  
alternating) mode, press this button, turning it on. It  
lights automatically for animation effects and title  
keys.  
3 Effect transition section  
4 Pattern/numeric keypad  
This is used for effect pattern selection, transition time  
setting, and other data entry.  
2 Display window mode indicators  
3 SET button  
1 TRANS RATE display window  
1 PATTERN NUMBER  
display window  
q; REV (reverse) button  
To carry out an effect in the reverse direction, press  
this button, turning it on.  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
TRANS RATE  
SET  
9 N/R button  
PATTERN NUMBER  
2 SET  
button  
SET  
4 MIX button  
q; REV button  
For an effect for which normal/reverse (alternating)  
operation is possible, once the effect is carried out, the  
direction is automatically reversed. After an effect is  
carried out in the normal (i.e. forward) direction, this  
button lights. After an effect is carried out in the  
reverse direction, this button goes off.  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
3 DIRECT RECALL button  
5 EFFECT button  
4 DIRECT  
PATTERN  
button  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
TITLE  
LAST X  
INS  
7
4
1
0
8
5
9
6 TITLE button  
CUT  
qa Fader lever  
DEL  
6
7 CUT button  
qa Fader lever  
Move this to carry out an effect transition manually.  
5 PATTERN/  
KEY PAD  
buttons  
qs Fader lever stiffness  
adjusting screw  
P IN P  
AUTO  
TRANS  
RST  
2
3
8 AUTO TRANS button  
qd Transition indicator  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
Note  
After powering the system on, move the fader lever to  
the end of its travel once in each direction. This  
ensures that the fader lever will function correctly.  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1 PATTERN NUMBER display window  
This shows an effect pattern number.  
While you are entering a pattern number, the dot at the  
lower right of each numeral lights.  
1 TRANS (transition) RATE display window  
5 EFFECT button  
qs Fader lever stiffness adjusting screw  
This shows the transition time for effects, downstream  
keys, and fade-to-black, in units of frames. While you  
are entering a time, the dot at the lower right of each  
numeral lights.  
To carry out the next transition with an effect pattern  
applied, press this button, turning it on.  
Turn this screw with a miniature Phillips screwdriver  
to adjust the fader lever stiffness. Turn clockwise to  
make the fader lever harder to move, and  
6 TITLE button  
2 SET button  
counterclockwise to make it easier to move.  
To carry out an effect or a mix in title mode, press this  
button, turning it on. The title keying is carried out,  
inserting the characters and graphics with the effect  
pattern and transition settings applied.  
Press this button, turning it on, to enter the pattern  
number specification mode. In this mode, you can use  
the PATTERN/KEY PAD buttons to specify an effect  
pattern number.  
Press this button once more, turning it off, to return to  
the direct pattern selection mode.  
2 Display window mode indicators  
These indicate the kind of transition time shown in the  
TRANS RATE display window.  
EFFECT: Transition time of an effect  
DSK: Transition time of a downstream key  
FTB: Transition time of a fade-to-black  
qd Transition indicator  
This indicator consisting of 20 LEDs shows the  
progress of an effect transition.  
7 CUT button  
Press this button to carry out an instantaneous  
transition.  
3 DIRECT RECALL button  
3 SET button  
Press this button, turning it on, to enter the direct recall  
mode. In this mode, pressing one of the PATTERN/  
KEY PAD buttons 0 to 9 recalls the corresponding  
snapshot 0 to 9.  
To set the transition time for an effect, downstream  
key, or fade-to-black, press this button, turning it on.  
While it is lit, each time you press, the display window  
mode indicators change. To set the transition time  
corresponding to the display of the display window  
mode indicators, enter the value using the pattern/  
numeric keypad.  
8 AUTO TRANS (automatic transition) button  
Press this button to carry out an effect automatically.  
When you press this button, the effect is carried out  
automatically, with the transition time which has been  
set. During the transition this button is lit. Pressing this  
button during the transition pauses it. Press the button  
once more to resume the transition.  
If you set the fader lever to an intermediate position  
and press this button, the transition pauses at the  
position corresponding to the fader lever position.  
4 DIRECT PATTERN button  
Press this button, turning it on, to enter the direct  
pattern selection mode. In this mode, you can use the  
PATTERN/KEY PAD buttons (0 to 9 and P IN P/  
RST) to directly select the assigned effect patterns.  
When the system is powered on, and after exiting any  
other operating mode, it automatically switches to  
direct pattern selection mode.  
4 MIX button  
To carry out the next transition without applying an  
effect pattern, but as a mix, press this button, turning it  
on.  
2-4  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel  
5 PATTERN/KEY PAD buttons  
These function as shown in the following table,  
according to the selected mode.  
3 DSK (downstream keyer) button  
Press this button, turning it on, to insert the  
downstream key set by the DSK section buttons in the  
menu control section into the program output video.  
By pressing the SET button in the effect transition  
section, you can set the downstream key transition  
time.  
Changing labels  
You can change the labels on the buttons, using the  
supplied labels.  
2 DSK section  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
For details of how to change the labels, see page A-63.  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
Functions of the PATTERN/KEY PAD buttons  
1 TITLE section  
Button  
Mode  
3 EDGE  
section  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
PATTERN  
Set the pattern Set the  
DIRECT  
PATTERN  
TRANS  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
DIRECT RECALL  
6 SET UP  
6 EDITOR and GPI buttons  
button  
SET UP  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
0 to 9  
Select the  
–
Specify a  
snapshot  
number.  
Recall one of  
snapshots 0 to 9.  
pattern shown  
number.  
transition time.  
5 SHIFT  
on the button.a)  
button  
SHIFT  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
LAST X/INS  
–
–
Add a key  
frame.  
–
Return to the  
state before  
recalling a  
snapshot.  
Return to the state  
before recalling a  
snapshot. (Press  
LAST X while  
1 EDITOR button  
4 CCR, LIGHTING, and  
MATTES buttons  
EDITOR  
(Press LAST X holding down the  
2 GPI button  
while holding  
down the  
ENTER button.)  
GPI  
ENTER button.)  
1 TITLE section  
DEL  
–
Delete the last Delete a key  
Delete the last  
character  
entered.  
Delete the last  
character  
entered.  
–
–
The title key function allows you to superimpose  
characters or graphics by cutting out part of the  
foreground video with a key source signal, and  
applying the effect to the background video.  
There are two ways of using the key source signal: as a  
luminance key depending only on image intensity, or  
as a chroma key, based on a particular color.  
Using the buttons in columns 1 and 2 of the TITLE  
section, you can insert two title keys (TITLE 2  
requires the optional BKDF-711 board to be installed).  
To insert a title key, press the TITLE button in the  
effect transition section.  
character  
entered.  
frame.  
1 EDITOR button  
Press this button, turning it on, to accept control from  
an external editor connected to the EDITOR connector  
on the rear panel of the processor unit.  
Press this button once again to turn it off; control is no  
longer accepted from the external editor.  
P IN P/RST  
UP  
Reset the input Reset the input Initialize the  
Reset the input  
value.  
Select the  
value.  
value.  
parameters.  
pattern shown  
on the button.a)  
Increment the  
pattern number.  
Increment the  
pattern number.  
Increment the  
transition time  
by one frame.  
Increment the  
key frame  
number.  
Increment the  
snapshot  
number.  
Increment the  
snapshot number.  
Decrement the Decrement the Decrement the  
key frame  
number.  
DOWN  
ENTER  
Decrement the Decrement the Decrement the  
pattern number. pattern number. transition time  
by one frame.  
2 GPI button  
snapshot  
number.  
snapshot number.  
Press this button, turning it on, to accept GPI signals  
input to the GPI/T 1 and 2 connectors on the rear panel  
of the processor unit.  
Press this button once again to turn it off; GPI signals  
are no longer accepted.  
–
Confirm the  
input value.  
Confirm the  
input value.  
Change the key Confirm the  
frame. input value.  
Return to the state  
before recalling a  
snapshot. (Press  
LAST X while  
The TITLE 1 and TITLE 2 buttons include the  
following.  
holding down the  
CRK (chroma key) button: Press this to use a  
chroma key to cut out the image. When pressed,  
this button lights, and portions of the foreground  
image of the designated color are cut out as the  
key source signal. When this button is lit, the  
LUM button is off.  
ENTER button.)  
–: Not used  
1 DSK PVW (downstream keyer preview) button  
When this button is pressed, turning it on, the program  
output video is output from the preview output  
connectors with the downstream key inserted.  
7 Menu control section  
a) For the pattern allocation, see pages 3-18 to 3-20.  
For various effect settings, you press a particular  
button in the menu control section, to display a setting  
menu in the effect control section. Some buttons toggle  
on and off when pressed: in this case the  
5 Fade-to-black and DSK section  
You can carry out chroma keying simply, using  
the auto chroma key function.  
2 FADE TO BLACK button  
Press this button, turning it on, to change the entire  
program output video to a preset color (factory default:  
black). To set the color, press the MATTES button in  
the menu control section, and display the setting menu  
in the effect control section ((F1) SELECT-FTB).  
corresponding effect is disabled when the button is off.  
LUM (luminance) button: Press this to use a  
luminance key to cut out the image. When  
pressed, this button lights, and portions of the  
foreground image are cut out based on the  
luminance level. When this button is lit, the CRK  
button is off.  
1 DSK PVW button  
DSK PVW  
Displaying the menu for a button already lit  
Hold down the SHIFT button and press the button  
again. This leaves the button lit (and the effect  
enabled), while bringing up the menu in the effect  
control section. For the LUM and CRK buttons in the  
TITLE section, it is not necessary to hold down the  
SHIFT button.  
FADE  
TO  
2 FADE TO BLACK button  
BLACK  
By pressing the SET button in the effect transition  
section, you can set the fade-to-black transition time.  
3 DSK button  
DSK  
2-6  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel  
3 EDGE section  
4 CCR, LIGHTING, and MATTES buttons  
CCR (color corrector) button: Press this button to  
use the color corrector. When you press this  
button, it lights, and you can adjust the color  
corrector settings in the effect control section.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and exit  
the color corrector.  
LIGHTING button: Press this button to apply  
lighting effects to the foreground image. When  
you press this button, it lights, and you can adjust  
the lighting settings in the effect control section.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and  
remove the lighting effect.  
5 SHIFT button  
MASK button: Press this button to mask off a part  
of the key source signal. When you press this  
button, it lights, and the system is now in mask  
mode, and you can select a rectangular mask in  
the effect control section. Normally, the area  
outside the mask rectangle is the area which is  
masked. To invert the mask, so that the area inside  
the rectangle is masked, set INVERT (F5) to ON  
in the effect control section.  
This controls the edge effects applied to the boundary  
between the foreground and background images.  
TRAIL SHADOW button: Press this button to  
apply a trail, drop border, or shadow effect. When  
you press this button, it lights, and you can select  
and adjust the effect in the effect control section.  
• Trail: The foreground pattern leaves a trail of  
afterimages.  
When a button in the menu control section is lit, but  
the corresponding menu is not displayed in the effect  
control section, hold down the SHIFT button and press  
the lit button. This brings up the menu, without  
interrupting the function selection, and leaving the  
button lit.  
This applies to the following buttons:  
• MASK buttons in the TITLE section  
• BORDER and MASK buttons in the DSK section  
• TRAIL SHADOW, BEVELD EDGE, SOFT, and  
BORDER buttons in the EDGE section  
• CCR button and LIGHTING button  
• Drop border: This applies a border in the  
background of the foreground image.  
• Shadow: This applies a shadow behind the  
foreground image.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and end  
mask mode.  
2 DSK (downstream keyer) section  
Press the button once more to turn it off and  
remove the edge effect.  
MATTES button: By pressing this button, you can  
carry out various matte adjustments, matte copies,  
and internal video signal selections in the effect  
control section.  
Using a downstream key, you can add characters or  
graphics to an image to which an effect has already  
been applied. Unlike a title key, you can add this to an  
image with a foreground and background  
superimposed. To insert a downstream key, press the  
DSK button in the fade-to-black and DSK section.  
LUM (luminance) button: Press this to display a  
menu in the effect control section for adding a key  
based on the luminance level of an input signal. In  
the effect control section you can select the input  
signal to the DSK KEY IN connector on the rear  
panel or the input signal selected by the DSK  
FILL button in the delegation section as the key  
source signal.  
6 SET UP button  
BEVELD (beveled) EDGE button: Press this button  
to apply a three-dimensional beveled effect to the  
boundary between the foreground and background  
images. When you press this button, it lights, and  
you can adjust the beveled edge settings in the  
effect control section.  
To access the setup menus for system and control  
panel settings, press this button. The setup menu  
appears in the effect control section.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and  
remove the beveled edge effect.  
SOFT button: Press this button to soften the  
boundary between the foreground and background  
images. When you press this button, it lights, and  
you can adjust the degree of softness in the effect  
control section.  
BORDER button: Press this button to apply a border  
to the characters and graphics inserted as a  
downstream key. When you press this button, it  
lights, and you can adjust the border settings in the  
effect control section.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and  
remove the soft edge effect.  
BORDER button: Press this button to apply a border  
to the boundary between the foreground and  
background images. When you press this button, it  
lights, and you can adjust the border settings in the  
effect control section.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and  
remove the border.  
Adjusting the cropping: To adjust the cropping, use  
the second page (CROP) of the adjustment menu  
for beveled edge, soft edge, or border.  
Press the button once more to turn it off, and  
remove the border.  
MASK button: Press this button to mask unwanted  
parts of the characters and graphics inserted as a  
downstream key. When you press this button, it  
lights, and the system is now in mask mode, and  
you can select a rectangular mask in the effect  
control section. Normally, the area outside the  
mask rectangle is the area which is masked. To  
invert the mask, so that the area inside the  
rectangle is masked, set INVERT (F5) to ON in  
the effect control section.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and end  
mask mode.  
2-8  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel  
• Changing a setting value preceded by “+” (setup  
menu operations)  
q; Snapshot section  
8 Effect control section  
Hold down the corresponding F button (F1 to F5),  
and turn the control knob.  
SNAP SHOT  
• Changing a setting value followed by “+” (user  
program effect setting operations)  
Hold down the corresponding F button (F1 to F5),  
and enter the numeric value using the numeric  
keypad.  
1 SNAP SHOT number display  
1 Menu display  
2 LEARN button  
LEARN  
9 User program section  
3 RECALL button  
2 INITIAL button  
RECALL  
INITIAL  
3 PAGE button  
4 HOLD INPUT button  
USER PGM  
HOLD  
INPUT  
1 STATUS display  
2 EDIT display  
4 PATTERN ADJ button  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
STATUS EDIT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
6 F1 to F5 buttons  
1 SNAP SHOT number display  
3 EDIT button  
This shows a snapshot number (0 to 99). While you are  
entering a number, the dot at the lower right of each  
numeral lights.  
5 Control knobs  
EDIT  
1 Menu display  
This shows system and effect settings. Watch this  
display while checking and adjusting the settings.  
3 PAGE button  
1 STATUS display  
2 LEARN button  
Press this button to save the control panel settings as a  
snapshot (learn function).  
When you press this button, it lights, and the system  
enters learn mode. Enter the snapshot number (0 to 99)  
from the numeric keypad, and press the ENTER button  
to save the control panel settings in the snapshot.  
Press this button to move to the next page of a menu.  
Pressing this button on the last page of a menu returns  
to the first page.  
Holding down the SHIFT button in the menu control  
section and pressing this button moves to the previous  
menu.  
When a user program effect is selected, this shows the  
number of key frames comprising the effect.  
(Maximum 8)  
Menu name or pattern number  
Settings  
2 EDIT display  
In the user program edit mode, this shows the key  
frame number to which editing applies.  
INIT SETUP--SNAP--USRPGM--KEYPAD EXEC  
OFF  
6/8  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
4 PATTERN ADJ (adjust) button  
Press this button to adjust the settings for the pattern  
number displayed in the PATTERN NUMBER display  
window.  
This displays the settings for the pattern in the effect  
control section.  
3 RECALL button  
3 EDIT button  
Press this button to recall settings saved as a snapshot.  
When you press this button, it lights, and the system  
enters recall mode. Enter the snapshot number (0 to  
99) from the numeric keypad, and press the ENTER  
button to recreate the control panel settings from the  
snapshot on the control panel.  
Setting values (ON/OFF or parameter values)  
Press this button to edit a user program effect. When  
you press this button, it lights, and the system enters  
the user program edit mode.  
Press the button once more to turn it off and exit the  
user program edit mode.  
Menu page  
2 INITIAL button  
This returns settings to their factory defaults.  
• To return a selected setting to its factory default  
Hold down the INITIAL button, and press the  
corresponding F button (F1 to F5).  
• To return all settings on the selected page to their  
factory defaults  
Hold down the INITIAL button, and press the PAGE  
button.  
• To return all settings on all pages of the currently  
selected menu to their factory defaults (not valid  
in setup menu or matte menu)  
5 Control knobs  
These correspond to the five settings shown in the  
menu display. Turn the corresponding knob to adjust a  
setting.  
Note  
If you press the EDIT button when an effect other than  
a user program effect is selected, this does not switch  
to user program edit mode.  
6 F1 to F5 buttons  
These correspond to the five settings shown in the  
menu display.  
Press the corresponding button to select a setting, or  
toggle it on and off.  
Hold down the INITIAL button, and press the  
PATTERN ADJ button.  
2-10  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Panel  
Processor Unit  
4 HOLD INPUT button  
Front Panel  
To hold the primary cross-point bus settings and the  
auxiliary bus settings (signal selections) fixed when  
recalling a snapshot, press this button. When you press  
this button, it lights, and when you recall a snapshot,  
the system is in the hold input mode. When you recall  
a snapshot in this mode, all settings are recreated on  
the control panel except those relating to the primary  
cross-point bus and the auxiliary bus.  
qs 25-pin connector (rear panel)  
Power indicator  
Power switch  
Press the button once more to turn it off and exit the  
hold input mode.  
Use the supplied 25-pin control cable to connect this to  
the PANEL connector on the processor unit.  
qa Location section  
2 Joystick  
Power switch and indicator  
This powers the unit on and off. Press the “ ” side of  
the switch to power on, and the “ ” side to power off.  
When the power is on, the power indicator lights  
amber.  
3 Z-knob  
LOCATION  
1 LOCATION button  
Rear Panel  
1 LOCATION button  
Press this button to use the joystick and Z-knob. When  
you press this button, it lights, and enables the joystick  
and Z-knob.  
Press the button once more to disable the joystick and  
Z-knob, and return the effect pattern to its default  
position.  
4 PANEL connector  
1 PGM OUT connectors  
5 TALLY connector  
2 VIDEO INPUT connectors  
6 TERMINAL connector  
3 EDITOR  
connector  
PANEL  
DIGITAL I/O  
PGM OUT SDI INPUT  
OPTION  
ANALOG I/O  
PGM OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO INPUT  
Y/V 8/4  
COMPONENT/COMPOSITE  
(OPTION)  
COMPONENT  
COMPOSITE  
1
1
5
1
2
3
4
2
1
Y
8
7
6
5
7/3  
6/2  
5/1  
Y
Holding down the INITIAL button while pressing this  
button returns the setting to its default value.  
TALLY  
R-Y  
B-Y  
R-Y  
B-Y  
R-Y  
B-Y  
2
2
6
7
8
TERMINAL  
PVW  
EDITOR  
CLEAN  
OUT  
2 Joystick  
S
VIDEO  
S
VIDEO  
6
REF.VIDEO IN  
DSK KEY IN  
GPI/T  
2
1
8
7(OPTION)  
5
ON  
2
1
Use the joystick to position the effect pattern in the x-  
and y-directions.  
75Ω  
OFF  
ON  
BLACK BURST OUT  
AC IN  
3
2
1
75Ω  
OFF  
3 Z-knob  
q; DSK KEY IN connectors  
and 75Ω terminator  
switch  
Turn the Z-knob to move an effect pattern in the depth  
direction (the z-axis). With this you can change the  
effective size of the pattern.  
qf - AC IN connector  
qd U terminal  
qs GPI/T 1 and 2 connectors  
9 BLACK BURST OUT 1 to 3  
connectors  
8 PVW connector  
qa REF. VIDEO IN connectors and 75Ω  
terminator switch  
7 CLEAN OUT connector  
2-12  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Processor Unit  
COMPONENT/COMPOSITE (OPTION) 5 to 8  
(BNC-type)  
qa REF. (reference) VIDEO IN connectors (BNC-  
type) and 75Ω terminator switch  
1 PGM OUT (program output) connectors  
These output the final program output, that is, the  
video to which effects have been applied. Connect to  
VTR (recorder) and program monitor video input  
connectors. The following four types of output are  
provided, each with two channels (1 and 2).  
SDI (BNC): Output serial digital signals (270 MHz).  
COMPOSITE (BNC): Output composite video  
signals.  
COMPONENT (BNC): Output Betacam format  
component video signals (Y, R–Y, B–Y).  
S VIDEO (4-pin): Output S-video (Y/C separation)  
signals.  
7 CLEAN OUT connector (BNC-type)  
Outputs serial digital signals (270 MHz). Using the  
setup menu, you can select the output from the  
following three signals.  
CLEAN OUT: The program output signal, without  
the downstream key inserted.  
PVW OUT: The signal output is the same as the  
program output after completion of the effect  
transition. The title area can also be shown.  
KEY OUT: This outputs a key signal corresponding  
to the shape of a selected effect. Use it as the key  
source input to another device.  
These connectors can be used by installing either of  
the optional BKDF-701 and BKDF-702/702P boards.  
When the BKDF-701 board is installed, connect  
Betacam format component video signals. When the  
BKDF-702/702P board is installed, connect composite  
video signals. The signals can be input from a VTR  
with no time base corrector. When using the BKDF-  
701 to input signals from a VTR, they must come  
through a time base corrector.  
When using this unit synchronized to an external  
signal, input the external reference signal (black burst).  
When the 75Ω terminatior switch is in the OFF  
position, the connectors provide a loop-through  
connection; with the reference signal input to one  
connector, the other provides the same reference signal  
for another device. When not using the loop-through  
output, the 75Ω terminatior switch must be in the ON  
position.  
qs GPI/T (GPI/trigger) 1 and 2 connectors (BNC-  
type)  
Input external trigger signals. These are used when  
controlling editing with GPI signals or an editor (BVE-  
600).  
Connector  
Input signal for  
BKDF-701  
Input signal for  
BKDF-702/702P  
You can use all four formats simultaneously. The same  
signals are output from connectors 1 and 2.  
8 PVW (preview) connector (BNC-type)  
This is an analog composite preview output. The signal  
output is the same as the program output after  
completion of the effect transition. It is not possible to  
include the title area.  
Composite signal  
Not used  
Y/V  
Luminance (Y) signal  
R–Y  
Color difference  
signal (R–Y)  
2 VIDEO INPUT connectors  
These input video camera and VTR (player) video  
signals. The connectors are in four groups, as follows.  
• SDI INPUT 1 to 4, (OPTION) 5 to 8 (BNC)  
• COMPONENT 5/1, 6/2, 7/3, 8/4 (BNC)  
• COMPONENT/COMPOSITE (OPTION) 5 to 8  
(BNC)  
B–Y  
Color difference  
signal (B–Y)  
Not used  
qd U (ground) terminal  
Connect this to ground as required.  
9 BLACK BURST OUT 1 to 3 connectors (BNC-  
type)  
S VIDEO (OPTION) 5 to 8 (4-pin)  
qf - AC IN connector  
With the supplied power cord, connect to the AC  
supply.  
These output the black burst signals generated by the  
synchronizing signal generator internal to this unit.  
When an external synchronizing signal is input to the  
REF. VIDEO IN connectors, the black burst signal  
output is locked to the external synchronizing signal.  
Use the output from these connectors as a reference  
synchronizing signal when synchronizing input signal  
sources (character generators, etc.), or when  
synchronizing this unit with a VTR or editor to  
improve the precision of editing.  
Input S-video (Y/C separation) signals. These  
connectors can only be used when the optional BKDF-  
702/702P board is installed. The signals can be input  
from a VTR with no time base corrector.  
• S VIDEO (OPTION) 5 to 8 (4-pin)  
SDI INPUT 1 to 4, (OPTION) 5 to 8 (BNC-type)  
Input serial digital signals (270 MHz).  
Connectors 5 to 8 can only be used when the optional  
BKDF-701 SDI and Component Input Board is  
installed.  
3 EDITOR connector (9-pin)  
Use this connector when controlling this unit with an  
editor (PVE-500, BVE-2000 series, or other editing  
control unit). Using an optional 9-pin remote control  
cable, connect to the 9-pin control connector of the  
editor.  
The input signals to these connectors must be  
synchronized to this unit.  
q; DSK (downstream keyer) KEY IN connectors  
(BNC-type) and 75 Ω terminator switch  
Input the key source signal for a downstream key,  
from a character generator or other device.  
When the 75 Ω terminator switch is in the OFF  
position, the connectors provide a loop-through  
connection; with the key signal input to one connector,  
the other provides the same key source signal to  
another device. By connecting to an analog component  
Y connector on this unit, you can use it as a title key  
source.  
COMPONENT 5/1, 6/2, 7/3, 8/4 (BNC-type)  
Input Betacam format component video signals.  
Y: Input the luminance (Y) signal.  
R–Y: Input the R–Y color difference signal.  
B–Y: Input the B–Y color difference signal.  
The input signals to these connectors must be  
synchronized to this unit. Therefore, when inputing  
from a VTR, the signal must come through a time base  
corrector.  
The 8/4 column of connectors can be changed to RGB  
input connectors by a setup menu operation. In this  
case, connect G (with sync), R, and B signals to Y, R–  
Y, and B–Y respectively.  
4 PANEL connector (25-pin)  
With the supplied 25-pin control cable, connect to the  
25-pin connector of the control panel.  
5 TALLY connector (25-pin)  
Tally signals are output from this connector when the  
signal input to a VIDEO INPUT connector is selected  
on the control panel. Connect to the input signal  
sources (video cameras etc.). The outputs are relay  
contact signals, with a capacity of 200 mA / 30 V.  
When not using the loop-through output, the 75 Ω  
terminatior switch must be in the ON position.  
6 TERMINAL connector (USB type B)  
This is a USB interface connector. Use it when  
connecting to a computer for a software version  
upgrade.  
When the optional BKDF-702/702P Y/C and  
Composite Input Board is installed, you can select in  
the setup menu whether to use the 5/1, 6/2, 7/3, and  
8/4 connectors for component inputs 5 to 8 or  
component inputs 1 to 4.  
2-14  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
Chapter 2 Location and Function of Parts and Controls  
2-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
3
Basic Operation  
DME Switcher Introduction  
This section selects two of the many effects provided by the DFS-700/  
700P as examples, and describes the basic flow of operations to use them.  
It also describes the demonstration function, which automatically executes  
one hundred sample effects.  
Sequence of Operations  
The flow charts below show the general sequence of operations when  
using a DME switcher.  
Basic operations (to be  
always carried out)  
Advanced operations (to be  
carried out as required)  
Select the background image  
(see page 3-13)  
Select the foreground image  
(see page 3-13)  
Inserting characters and graphics (1)  
• Luminance key (see page 3-33)  
• Chroma key (see page 3-36)  
• Modifying the boundary (see page 3-26)  
• Changing the position and size (see page  
3-29)  
Select the effect  
(see pages 3-23 and 24)  
• Modifying the pattern (see page 3-31)  
Reversing the direction of the effect  
(see page 3-52)  
Set up the transition  
(see page 3-51)  
Execute the effect  
(see page 3-54)  
Inserting characters and graphics (2)  
• Downstream key (see page 3-45)  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Switcher Introduction  
Example Operation (1):Wipe  
Procedure  
In this example we’ll use the AUTO TRANS button, to make a wipe, with  
the new image appearing from the center of the screen.  
6
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
Setting items  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
As an example, we’ll set the control panel as follows.  
Background image (the image output before the transition): video  
signal connected to the VIDEO INPUT 1 connector  
Foreground image (the image output after the transition): video  
signal connected to the VIDEO INPUT 2 connector  
Effect: wipe (pattern number 24)  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
4
5,7  
8
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
3
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Transition time: 30 frames  
Program output  
10  
9
1
Executing the above effect produces the following changes in the output  
on a program monitor connected to the PGM OUT connector of the  
processor unit.  
<Preparation>  
1
2
Pull the fader lever toward you as far as it will go.  
Press BACKGROUND Bus button 1.  
<Image selection>  
The pressed button lights red, and the video signal connected to the  
VIDEO INPUT 1 connector is selected as the background image. The  
selected background image appears on the program monitor.  
3
4
Press FOREGROUND Bus button 2.  
Transition time  
End of effect  
Start of effect  
The pressed button lights amber, and the video signal connected to the  
VIDEO INPUT 2 connector is selected as the foreground image.  
To check the selected image on the program monitor, move the fader  
lever to the opposite end. After checking, return the lever to the  
position closest to you.  
If a preview monitor is connected, the selected foreground image  
appears in the preview monitor.  
<Effect selection>  
Press the DIRECT PATTERN button, turning it on.  
(If it is already lit, omit this step.)  
The unit is now in direct pattern selection mode. In this mode, you can  
select the eleven patterns assigned to buttons in the pattern/numeric  
keypad using the corresponding button.  
(Continued)  
3-2  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Switcher Introduction  
5
Press button 9 in the pattern/numeric keypad.  
Example Operation (2): Picture-in-Picture  
The button lights, and this selects the wipe assigned to this button  
(pattern number 24). The PATTERN NUMBER display window  
shows “0024”.  
Using the fader lever, we’ll insert the foreground image within the  
background image.  
We’ll apply a border around the edge of the foreground image.  
<Transition time setting>  
6
7
Press the SET button once or twice, so that the EFFECT display  
window mode indicator lights.  
(If it is already lit, omit this step.)  
Setting items  
In the pattern/numeric keypad, press buttons 3 and 0 in that order.  
The TRANS RATE display window shows “.3.0.”.  
As an example, we’ll set the control panel as follows.  
Background image: internal video signal (color background )  
Foreground image: video signal connected to the VIDEO INPUT 1  
connector  
Dots appear to  
the lower right of  
the digits  
Effect: picture-in-picture (pattern number 1100)  
Border: ON  
Program output  
8
9
Press the ENTER button.  
Executing the above effect produces the following changes in the output  
on a program monitor.  
The dots to the lower right of the digits disappear, and the value  
entered in step 7 is set as the transition time.  
Background image  
Press the EFFECT button, turning it on.  
(If it is already lit, omit this step.)  
10Press the AUTO TRANS button.  
Program output  
The wipe is carried out over 30 frames, switching from the background  
image to the foreground image.  
Foreground image  
Effect execution  
When the transition completes, BACKGROUND bus button 2 is lit  
red, and FOREGROUND bus button 1 is lit amber. This indicates that  
as a result of the transition, the video signal connected to the VIDEO  
INPUT 2 connector is automatically selected as the background image,  
and the video signal connected to the VIDEO INPUT 1 connector as  
the foreground image.  
3-4  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Switcher Introduction  
Procedure  
6
In the numeric keypad, press buttons 1, 1, 0, 0, in that order.  
The TRANS RATE display window shows “1.1.0.0.”.  
8
5
Dots appear to the lower right of the digits.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
7
8
Press the ENTER button.  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
2
3
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
The dots to the lower right of the digits disappear, and picture-in-  
picture, or pattern number 1100, is selected.  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
6
7
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
<Border settings>  
<Effect execution>  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTR  
In the menu control section, press the BORDER button.  
The button lights, enabling the border.  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
4
You can change the color and width of the border. For details, see the section  
“Modifying the Boundary” (page 3-26).  
1,9  
9
Move the fader lever to the opposite end.  
1
Pull the fader lever toward you as far as it will go.  
<Preparation>  
Both the BACKGROUND bus INT VIDEO button and the  
FOREGROUND bus button 1 light red.  
As you move the lever, the picture-in-picture effect takes place, and a  
foreground image with a border is inserted into the background image.  
<Image selection>  
2
Press the MATTES button in the menu control section, and display  
page 1 of the MATTE menu, then with the F1(SELECT) button select  
“INT V”.  
MATTE  
1/2  
SELECT  
INT V  
Lum  
Sat  
Hue  
0-99  
CH2BRD  
BRDMAT  
0-100  
0-100  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
You can change the color of matte color and embossing pattern. For details,  
see the section “Adjusting Color Mattes” (page 3-57).  
3
4
5
Press the BACKGROUND bus INT VIDEO button.  
The pressed button lights red, and a color matte is selected as the  
background image.  
Press the FOREGROUND bus button 1.  
The pressed button lights amber, and the video signal connected to the  
VIDEO INPUT 1 connector is selected as the foreground image.  
<Effect selection>  
Press the SET button to the right of the PATTERN NUMBER display  
window, turning it on.  
(If it is already lit, omit this step.)  
3-6  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Switcher Introduction  
Demonstration  
To end the demonstration  
Press the AUTO TRANS button once more.  
The demonstration ends, and the control panel settings are those of the last  
effect in the demonstration.  
The DFS-700/700P is equipped with a demonstration function, which  
automatically plays back one hundred effects stored in ROM in the  
processor unit.  
The effects (which by factory default are snapshots 0 to 99) have been  
chosen to demonstrate the features of the DFS-700/700P as effectively as  
possible.  
For maximum effect, the demonstration function uses the signals  
connected to VIDEO INPUT connectors 1 and 2, and the internal video  
signal.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
Pattern/numeric  
keypad  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
AUTO TRANS button  
Buttons used for the demonstration  
To start the demonstration  
In the pattern/numeric keypad, hold down buttons 1 and 9, and press the  
AUTO TRANS button.  
The one hundred effects stored in ROM are played back continuously, and  
repeated until you press the AUTO TRANS button once more. During the  
demonstration, the buttons on the pattern/numeric keypad light in turn in  
the clockwise direction.  
During the demonstration, the control panel does not accept any operations  
other than pressing the AUTO TRANS button.  
Demonstration with user-registered snapshots  
It is also possible to have a demonstration with user-registered snapshots.  
In this case, hold down buttons 3 and 7 in the pattern/numeric keypad, and  
press the AUTO TRANS button. During the demonstration, the buttons on  
the pattern/numeric keypad light in turn in the counterclockwise direction.  
3-8  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DME Switcher Introduction  
Using the Menus  
Changing settings  
• For settings with values shown in letters, press the corresponding one of  
buttons F1 to F5.  
In the text, this is shown as “the F1(SELECT) button,” with the setting  
name after the button name F1 to F5.  
• To change a setting with a numerical value, turn the corresponding one of  
control knobs F1 to F5.  
This unit incorporates menus for various effect settings and internal color  
matte settings, and also a setup menu for system settings.  
This section describes the basic menu operation.  
Accessing a menu  
In the text, this is shown as “the F2(Lum) knob,” with the setting name  
after the knob name F1 to F5.  
Menu control section  
Menu display  
• In the setup menu, when an item has a plus sign in front, hold down the F  
button (F4 or F5) and turn the corresponding knob.  
For example, in page 3/8 of the setup menu, to change the setting for F4  
[+H-pos], hold down the F4 button and turn the F4 knob.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
To change the menu page  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
Press the PAGE button.  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
Buttons of the menu control section which light when pressed  
When you press one of these buttons, it lights, and the settings in the menu  
recalled by the button are reflected in the monitor display. To avoid this,  
for example just to check the settings in a menu, hold down the SHIFT  
button while pressing the menu button.  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Press one of the buttons in the menu control section.  
For example, to recall the menu for internal color matte settings, press the  
MATTES button in the menu control section. The MATTE menu appears  
in the menu display in the effect control section.  
In this manual, menus are shown in a tabular format. The following  
example shows the MATTE menu.  
Menu page number  
“1/2” means that this is the  
first of two pages.  
Menu name  
MATTE  
P 1/2  
PAGE  
SELECT  
INT V  
Lum  
Sat  
Hue  
0-99  
CH2BRD  
BRDMAT  
Setting items  
(parameters)  
0-100  
0-100  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
A “P” appears  
here when preread  
editing is on.  
Refers to buttons and  
knobs F1 to F5.  
Values for the settings  
“0-100” indicates a numerical range.  
Refers to the PAGE button.  
3-10  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Images  
Selecting the background image and foreground image  
As the background image and foreground image you can select any of the  
Background Image and Foreground Image  
video signals connected to the VIDEO INPUT 1 to 8 connectors of the  
processor unit (corresponding to BACKGROUND/FOREGROUND bus  
buttons 1 to 8), a freeze frame stored in the frame memory (MEMORY  
button), or internal pattern signal (INT VIDEO button).  
Background and foreground in a transition effect  
In a transition from one image to another, the old image is referred to as  
the “background image”. The new image, which replaces the old image, is  
referred to as the “foreground image”.  
When a transition completes, the background image and foreground image  
are interchanged.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
B: background image  
F: foreground image  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
B
F B  
F
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
Example transition effect: wipe  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Background and foreground in an animation effect  
In an animation effect, in which an effect pattern is inserted in the image or  
moved about on the image, the background image is the background to the  
effect, and the inserted effect is referred to as the “foreground image”.  
When an animation effect completes, the background image and  
foreground image are not interchanged.  
1
2
To select the background image, press one of BACKGROUND bus  
buttons 1 to 8.  
The pressed button lights red.  
B: background image  
F: foreground image  
To select the foreground image, press one of FOREGROUND bus  
buttons 1 to 8.  
B
F
B
The pressed button lights amber.  
Program output and lit button colors  
The BACKGROUND bus buttons and FOREGROUND bus buttons light  
in two colors, depending on whether or not the corresponding image is  
present in the current program monitor output (on a video monitor  
connected to the PGM OUT connector).  
Example animation effect: picture-in-picture  
• A button lights red when the image is present in the program monitor  
output.  
• A button lights amber when the image is not present in the program  
monitor output.  
3-12  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Images  
Switching the internal video signal selected by the INT VIDEO button  
Previewing the image after an effect is executed  
Select the background image and foreground image, and set up the effect,  
To switch the internal video signal selected by pressing the INT VIDEO  
button on either the background bus or foreground bus, use the following  
procedure.  
then move the fader lever to the opposite end.  
You can now check on the program monitor the result of carrying out the  
currently set effect.  
If a preview monitor is connected, you can check the foreground image on  
the preview monitor.  
3
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
2
3
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
1
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
Press the MATTES button in the menu control section.  
Page 1 of the MATTE menu appears.  
Press the PAGE button in the effect control section, to display page 2  
of the MATTE menu, then press the F4(INTVID) button to select the  
desired signal.  
MATTE  
FROM  
INT V  
TO  
COPY  
EXEC  
INTVID  
Matte  
PTN  
1-80  
BORD  
2/2  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
You can select any of the following three possibilities.  
Matte: color background signal. In the following step 3, you can select  
any of plain, or 79 different embossed patterns.  
You can adjust the color of the color background signal as desired. For  
details, see the section “Adjusting Color Mattes” (page 3-57).  
Bar: color bars  
Grid: a grid pattern  
3
If you have selected a color background signal carry out either of the  
following.  
• Hold down the INT VIDEO button in the background bus or  
foreground bus, and in the pattern/numeric keypad press the UP or  
DOWN button.  
Each time you press, the pattern changes, and the new pattern appears  
on the program monitor.  
• Turn the F5(PTN) knob.  
3-14  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Effect  
Selecting Images  
This section describes the types of effects you can use on this system, and  
how to select an effect.  
Selecting Signals Output to the Auxiliary Bus  
Types of Effect  
Delegation buttons  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
The DFS-700/700P has more than 450 built-in effect patterns provided as  
standard.  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
Each pattern is identified by a number, and the patterns are grouped  
together under headings such as “wipe” and “picture-in-picture”.  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
Transition effects and animation effects  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Effects are broadly divided into transition effects and animation effects.  
Transition effects: in these effects the background image is completely  
replaced by the foreground image. When the effect completes, the  
colors in which the BACKGROUND and FOREGROUND bus  
buttons are lit become the reverse of those before the effect.  
Animation effects: in these effects, for example, the foreground image is  
inserted in the background image, and moved around. The foreground  
image does not completely replace the background image, and the  
colors in which the BACKGROUND and FOREGROUND bus  
buttons are lit stay the same.  
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
AUXILIARY buttons  
To select the signal to be output to the auxiliary bus, press the desired  
AUXILIARY button (BLACK, 1 to 8, MEMORY, or INT VIDEO),  
turning it on.  
For the differences between transition and animation effects, see the section  
“Background Image and Foreground Image” (page 3-12).  
To specify the function for which the selected signal is used, press one of  
the delegation buttons, turning it on.  
CCR button: use for color correction.  
TITLE 1 SOURCE button: use as the key source signal for title key 1.  
TITLE 2 SOURCE button: use as the key source signal for title key 2.  
DSK FILL button: use as key fill for the downstream keyer.  
SUPER BG button: use as background for 3D effects, two-channel  
DME effects and so on.  
Modifications to effects  
Depending on the effect pattern, the following modifications can be added.  
• You can add a border to the boundary between the background image and  
foreground image, or blur the boundary.  
• You can change the pattern position and size.  
For details of the modifications that can be applied to the effect patterns, see the  
section “Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations” (page A-22).  
FRGD 2 button: use as the second foreground channel for 3D effects,  
two-channel DME effects and so on.  
• You can change a pattern by changing its parameters. (Effects which can  
be changed by setting parameters are referred to as “user modifiable  
effects”.)  
MEMORY button: capture in frame memory.  
3-16  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Effect  
Example Effects  
4
This section shows as examples the effect patterns (“direct patterns”)  
which you can access simply by pressing a button in the pattern/numeric  
keypad. Note that the effect patterns shown below are the factory default  
assignments, and you can change the patterns assigned to buttons 0 to 9  
and P IN P/RST.  
Pattern number: 700  
Effect type: matrix wipe  
Motion type: transition  
The foreground image appears in the upper left corner, and fills the screen  
in a series of vertical strips.  
For details of how to change the assignments, see the section “Changing Direct  
Pattern Assignments” (page 4-1).  
5
Pattern number: 1300  
Effect type: slide  
Motion type: transition  
7
Pattern number: 1  
Effect type: wipe  
Motion type: transition  
The foreground image appears from the right, and slides over the  
background image to the left.  
The foreground image appears from the left, and wipes over the  
background image to the right.  
6
Pattern number: 1700  
Effect type: 3D rotation  
Motion type: transition  
8
Pattern number: 9  
Effect type: wipe  
Motion type: transition  
The foreground image appears as a door rotating toward the viewer to  
close, and covers the background. When the door is completely closed, the  
foreground fills the screen.  
The foreground image appears from the upper left corner, and wipes over  
the background image to the lower right.  
1
9
Pattern number: 1902  
Effect type: flip  
Motion type: transition  
Pattern number: 24  
Effect type: wipe  
Motion type: transition  
The image rotates about a vertical axis as though a panel with the  
background on one side. When the panel reaches 90 degrees to the plane of  
the screen, the foreground image appears on the other side, and completely  
fills the screen when the transition ends.  
The foreground image appears as a circle in the center of the image, and  
this circle grows, wiping over the background image.  
3-18  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Effect  
Nonlinear effects  
These effects include effects such as ripples, under names such as lens,  
burst, explosion, swirl, and rings.  
2
Pattern number: 2100  
Effect type: page turn  
Motion type: transition  
The foreground image appears as though progressively covering the  
background image.  
Ripple  
Lens  
Swirl  
3
Pattern number: 2200  
Effect type: sphere  
Motion type: transition  
Explosion  
The foreground image appears in a ball shape in the upper right. It  
“bounces” on the bottom of the screen, then when it reaches the top, turns  
into a plane and fills the screen, covering the background image.  
Two-channel DME effects  
These effects combine two foreground images with the background image.  
They include two-channel picture-in-picture, two-picture intersect, two-  
picture brick, two-channel page turn, and so on.  
P IN P  
RST  
Pattern number: 1100  
Effect type: picture-in-picture  
Motion type: animation  
The foreground image appears in the center as a rectangle, of the same  
aspect ratio as the screen, and grows larger until it covers the background  
image.  
Two-channel picture-in-picture Two-picture Intersect  
Masked flip  
Note  
To use two-channel DME effects requires the optional BKDF-711 2nd  
Channel DME Board.  
0
Pattern number: 2260  
Effect type: ripple  
Motion type: transition  
The foreground image appears as from within the ripples, finally covering  
the whole screen with no movement.  
3-20  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Effect  
3D mapping effects  
Selection in Direct Pattern Selection Mode  
These effects use nonlinear image processing techniques. They include 3D  
page turn, 3D beveled edge, and so on.  
In the direct pattern selection mode, pressing any button (other than INS,  
DEL, UP, DOWN, or ENTER) in the pattern/numeric keypad directly  
selects an effect pattern.  
For details of the effects assigned by factory default to the buttons in the pattern/  
numeric keypad, see the previous section “Example Effects” (page 3-18).  
3D wave  
3D beveled edge  
3D page turn  
Procedure  
To select an effect pattern in the direct pattern selection mode, use the  
following procedure.  
Note  
Three-picture cube  
Multi-cube  
3D cylinder  
If the EDIT button in the user program section (see page 2-11) is lit, first  
press it, turning it off.  
Note  
Using 3D mapping effects requires the optional BKDF-712 3D Video  
Mapping Effects Board.  
Using the three-picture cube effect also requires the optional BKDF-711  
2nd Channel DME Board.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
1
2
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
Press the DIRECT PATTERN button, turning it on.  
The unit is now in direct pattern selection mode.  
In the pattern/numeric keypad, press the button assigned to the desired  
effect pattern, turning it on.  
This selects the effect assigned to the button, and the pattern number  
appears in the PATTERN NUMBER display window.  
3-22  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting an Effect  
If you enter a wrong number  
Before pressing the ENTER button press the P IN P/RST button to cancel  
the wrong number, then enter the correct number.  
Selection in Pattern Number Specification Mode  
In the pattern number specification mode, you select the desired effect  
Note  
pattern by entering the number.  
If you enter an invalid number (a number with no corresponding pattern),  
this is automatically corrected to the closest valid number larger than the  
number you entered. However, if you enter a number larger than 9309 this  
is corrected to pattern number 0001.  
Procedure  
Adjusting the number before confirming  
To increment the number by one, press the UP button. Hold down the UP  
button to increase the number continuously.  
To select an effect pattern in the pattern number specification mode, use  
the following procedure.  
To decrement the number by one, press the DOWN button. Hold down the  
DOWN button to decrease the number continuously.  
Note  
If the EDIT button in the user program section (see page 2-11) is lit, first  
press it, turning it off.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
1
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
2
3
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
Press the SET button, turning it on.  
Enter the desired pattern number using buttons 0 to 9 on the pattern/  
numeric keypad.  
The number you entered appears in the PATTERN NUMBER display  
window. Dots appear at the lower right of each digit, indicating that  
the entry is not yet confirmed.  
3
Press the ENTER button.  
The dots to the lower right of the digits in the PATTERN NUMBER  
display window disappear, confirming the pattern number.  
3-24  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying the Boundary — Border, Soft Edge,  
Beveled Edge, and Crop  
To blur the image boundary  
Use the following procedure.  
You can apply a border to the boundary between the foreground image and  
background image, or mask unwanted parts of the image.  
There are four effects for modifying the boundary, as follows. You can use  
all four simultaneously.  
1
Press the SOFT button in the EDGE section, turning it on, and display  
page 1 of the EDGE menu.  
Border: apply a border to the image boundary.  
Soft edge: blur the image boundary.  
EDGE  
Border  
0-100  
Soft  
BvlWid  
BVLTYP  
01-20  
BvlInt  
0-100  
Beveled edge: apply a bevel to the image boundary.  
Crop: adjust the image boundary position, to eliminate unwanted parts.  
(For picture-in-picture and other effects in which a reduced image is  
used, reduce noise on the periphery of the image.)  
0-100  
–100-100  
1/2  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
2
Turn the F2(Soft) knob, to set the degree of boundary blurring.  
Note  
To apply a beveled edge to the image boundary  
Use the following procedure.  
Depending on the effect pattern, you may not be able to apply the above  
effects. For details, see the section “Effect Pattern Variant Forms and  
Decorations” (page A-22).  
1
Press the BEVELD EDGE button in the EDGE section, turning it on,  
and display page 1 of the EDGE menu.  
EDGE  
Border  
0-100  
Soft  
BvlWid  
BVLTYP  
01-20  
BvlInt  
0-100  
0-100  
–100-100  
Procedure  
1/2  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
2
Turn knobs F3(BvlWid), F4(BVLTYP), and F5(BvlInt) to set the  
width, type, and contrast of the beveled edge.  
EDGE section  
Effect control section  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
To remove unwanted portions of the image  
Use the following procedure.  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
1
Press any one of the BORDER, SOFT, and BEVELD EDGE buttons,  
turning it on, and display page 2 of the EDGE menu. (Press the PAGE  
button to change the page.)  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
EDGE  
CROP  
AUTO  
Left  
Right  
Top  
Bottom  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
–400-400  
–400-400  
–300-300  
–300-300  
2/2  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
2
3
To adjust the image boundary manually, press the F1(CROP) button to  
select “MANUAL”.  
Controls used in modifying the boundary  
Turn the F2(Left), F3(Right), F4(Top), F5(Bottom) knobs, to adjust the  
four sides of the image boundary.  
To apply a border  
Use the following procedure.  
Note  
1
Press the BORDER button in the EDGE section, turning it on, and  
display page 1 of the EDGE menu.  
If in step 2 you set F1(CROP) to “AUTO”, the automatic adjustment for  
the particular effect pattern is carried out. Selecting “OFF” disables the  
cropping.  
EDGE  
Border  
Soft  
BvlWid  
BVLTYP  
BvlInt  
0-100  
0-100  
–100-100  
01-20  
0-100  
1/2  
When effect parameters are already adjusted  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
When parameters of a border, soft edge, beveled edge, or crop effect are  
already adjusted, simply pressing any one of the BORDER, SOFT, and  
BEVELD EDGE buttons in the EDGE section to turn it on allows you to  
apply the selected effects to the effect pattern.  
2
Turn the F1(Border) knob, to set the width of the border.  
3-26  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Pattern Position and Size —  
Location (X)(Y)(Z)  
Modifying the Boundary — Border, Soft Edge, Beveled Edge, and Crop  
Indications in the EDGE menu with square brackets [ ]  
The parameters in the EDGE menu for functions which are turned off  
appear in square brackets [ ].  
For example, when the border function is off, when you display the EDGE  
menu the setting for Border appears in square brackets.  
In this state the knob adjustment is still valid. When you press the  
BORDER button, turning the function on, the new setting is reflected  
accordingly.  
You can adjust the position and size of an effect pattern when inserting a  
foreground image into the background image.  
Note  
For some effect patterns it is not possible to change their position and size.  
If pressing the LOCATION button does not turn it on, it means that one of  
those effect patterns is selected.  
For details of whether position and size adjustment is possible for an effect, see  
the section “Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations” (page A-22).  
Procedure  
To change the position and size of an effect pattern use the following  
procedure.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
2
3
1
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
After checking in the section “Effect Pattern Variant Forms and  
Decorations” (page A-22), select an effect pattern for which it is  
possible to change the position and size.  
To move the pattern horizontally (x-axis) or vertically (y-axis), move  
the joystick in the location section.  
Y-axis (+)  
X-axis (–)  
X-axis (+)  
Y-axis (–)  
Joystick  
(continued)  
3-28  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing the Pattern Position and Size — Location (X)(Y)(Z)  
Modifying the Pattern — User Modifiable Effects  
3
To move the pattern in the depth direction (z-axis), turn the Z-knob in  
the location section.  
User modifiable effects are those effects for which you can modify the  
effect pattern by varying the parameters. The variable parameters vary  
from effect to effect.  
For the pattern number of user modifiable effects, and the variable parameters,  
see the section “Effect Control Parameter List” (page A-5)  
Procedure  
Z-knob  
To modify the effect pattern by varying the parameters, use the following  
procedure.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
2
1
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
After checking in the section “Effect Control Parameter List” (page A-  
5), select a user modifiable effect.  
The variable parameters of the selected effect appear in the menu  
display.  
If the selected effect has no variable parameters, the menu display  
shows a message “No Adjustable Parameter”.  
Using knobs and buttons F1 to F5, set the parameters.  
3-30  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying the Pattern — User Modifiable Effects  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
Example of user modifiable effect parameters  
As an example, if you select mosaic (pattern number 1016), the following  
parameters appear in the menu display.  
You can insert (or superimpose) text and graphics into the background  
image while applying effects. You can use either a luminance key or a  
chroma key for this insertion.  
1016  
Size  
Aspect  
Soft  
MskAsp  
TYPE  
0-100  
0-100  
0-100  
0-100  
FLAT  
1/1  
Luminance Key  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
For the effect of the parameters, see the following figure.  
In a luminance key, a certain luminance level in the foreground image is  
used as the threshold for creating the key signal, and the corresponding  
part of the foreground image is inserted into the background image.  
Normally the foreground image is on a black background, consisting of  
bright text to be inserted in the background image.  
F1(Size): size of a mosaic cell  
F2(Aspect): aspect ratio of a mosaic cell  
Background image  
Foreground image  
F4(MskAsp): aspect ratio of area to  
which mosaic is applied  
Parameters for mosaic (pattern number 1016)  
Composite image formed by  
luminance keying (program output)  
Two-channel luminance keying  
With the optional 2nd Channel DME Board installed, you can also use a  
second luminance key channel.  
When using two luminance keys, you must make both title 1 and title 2  
settings in the TITLE section of the menu control section. Note that to  
select the foreground signal used for the second luminance key, in the  
delegation section press the FRGD 2 button, turning it on, then select the  
desired video signal with one of the AUXILIARY buttons.  
3-32  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
Procedure  
4
5
In the TITLE section of the menu control section, press a LUM button,  
turning it on.  
To insert text and graphics in a background image by means of a  
luminance key, use the following procedure.  
The luminance key menu appears in the menu display. In the following  
example, the LUM button in column 1 is lit.  
T1LUM  
Clip  
Gain  
INVERT  
OFF  
FILL  
Densty  
0-100  
4
6
0-100  
0-100  
VIDEO  
1/1  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
Either press the CUT button in the effect transition section, or move  
the fader lever.  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
MASK  
CCR  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
3
A composite of the foreground and background images appears in the  
program monitor.  
At this point, though, (before adjustment), either of the background  
image or foreground image may not be visible.  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
When the foreground image consists of dark lettering on a  
light background  
In the luminance key menu, press the F3(INVERT) button, turning it  
on, then continue to step 6.  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
5
6
Watching the composite image on the program monitor, use the  
F1(Clip) knob and F2(Gain) knob to adjust the clip and gain as  
necessary.  
1
2
With the BACKGROUND bus buttons, select the background image.  
The selected background image appears on the program monitor.  
With the FOREGROUND bus buttons, select the foreground image.  
To switch between the composite image and the background  
image  
Press the CUT button. This toggles between the composite image and the  
background image.  
If a preview monitor is connected, the selected foreground image  
appears in the preview monitor.  
To fill the inserted text or image with a color matte (using a  
color matte as key fill)  
You can use the same color as a border or the same color as an effect.  
• To use the same color as a border, in the luminance key menu, press the  
F4(FILL) button to select “BDRMAT”.  
3
Select the effect pattern, and press the TITLE button in the effect  
transition section, turning it on.  
Note  
• To use the same color as an effect, in the luminance key menu, press the  
F4(FILL) button to select “EFFMAT”.  
Depending on the effect pattern, it may not be possible to use a luminance  
key. If such a pattern is selected, the TITLE button does not light. Check  
the “TITLE” column of the table in the section “Effect Pattern Variant  
Forms and Decorations” (page A-22), and select a pattern for which this  
shows a check mark (√).  
To change the color of color mattes, see the section “Adjusting Color Mattes”  
(page 3-57).  
To return from a color matte key fill to the foreground image, press the  
F4(FILL) button to select “VIDEO”.  
When the TITLE button lights, the N/R button also automatically lights,  
indicating that the system is in N/R (normal/reverse) mode. While the  
TITLE button is lit, it is not possible to switch out of N/R mode.  
Creating a composite image with a semi-transparent  
foreground image  
Watching the composite image on the program monitor, turn the  
F5(Densty) knob, to adjust the transparency of the foreground image.  
To remove the luminance key  
Press the TITLE button in the effect transition section, turning it off.  
3-34  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
Chroma Keying  
Auto chroma keying  
To combine the background image and foreground image by auto chroma  
keying, use the following procedure.  
In chroma keying, a key signal is created based on a specific reference  
color in the foreground image, and used to replace the corresponding parts  
of the foreground image by the background image. Normally, the  
foreground image is created with a plain blue background, which is then  
replaced by the background image.  
4
6
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
Background image  
Foreground image  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
5,7  
3
CRK  
MASK  
CCR  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
1
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Composite image formed by chroma  
1
2
Select the background image with the BACKGROUND bus buttons.  
The selected background image appears on the program monitor.  
Select the foreground image with the FOREGROUND bus buttons.  
keying (program output)  
In this system, you can use either of the following methods to carry out  
chroma keying.  
•Auto chroma keying  
You point the cursor at part of the background, thus specifying the keying  
color. This is the quick and easy way to make a composite image.  
•Manual chroma keying  
You specify the keying color by manual adjustment. This allows you  
finer control than with auto chroma keying.  
If a preview monitor is connected, the selected foreground image  
appears in the preview monitor.  
3
Select the effect pattern, and press the TITLE button in the effect  
transition section, turning it on.  
Note  
By starting with auto chroma keying, then using manual chroma key  
adjustments as required, you can get the optimum composite image  
efficiently.  
Depending on the effect pattern, it may not be possible to use chroma  
keying. If such a pattern is selected, the TITLE button does not light.  
Check the “TITLE” column of the table in the section “Effect Pattern  
Variant Forms and Decorations” (page A-22), and select a pattern for  
which this shows a check mark (√).  
Two-channel chroma keying  
With the optional BKDF-711 2nd Channel DME Board installed, you can  
use a second chroma key channel.  
When the TITLE button lights, the N/R button also automatically lights,  
indicating that the system is in N/R (normal/reverse) mode. While the  
TITLE button is lit, it is not possible to switch out of N/R mode.  
To use two chroma key channels, set both title 1 and title 2 in the TITLE  
section of the menu control section. To select the foreground image used  
for the second chroma key channel, press the FRGD 2 button in the  
delegation section, turning it on, then with one of the AUXILIARY  
buttons select the desired video signal.  
(continued)  
To use a normal effect for a title key  
In this case, use one of the buttons in column 1 of the TITLE section to  
recall the title 1 setting menu (T1LUM, T1CRK, or T1MSK), and make  
the settings.  
3-36  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
Making fine adjustments to the composite image  
Following the manual chroma key procedure (see next page), adjust the  
hue, clip, and gain for the specified chroma key color.  
4
In the TITLE section of the menu control section, press the CRK  
button, turning it on.  
You can also adjust the luminance of the part cut out by the chroma key.  
In the menu display page 1 of the chroma key menu appears. The  
following example appears when the CRK button in column 1 is lit.  
To switch between the composite image and the background  
image  
Press the CUT button. This toggles between the composite image and the  
background image.  
T1CRK  
Clip  
Gain  
Hue  
0-99  
Angle  
0-100  
AUTO  
0-100  
0-100  
1/3  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
5
Press the F5(AUTO) button.  
To fill the inserted text or image with a color matte (using a  
color matte as key fill)  
You can use the same color as a border or the same color as an effect.  
• To use the same color as a border, in the chroma key menu (T1CRK),  
press the F4(FILL) button to select “BDRMAT”.  
In the program monitor screen, the foreground image appears with a  
white box cursor.  
• To use the same color as an effect, in the chroma key menu (T1CRK),  
press the F4(FILL) button to select “EFFMAT”.  
Cursor  
To change the color of color mattes, see the section “Adjusting Color Mattes”  
(page 3-57).  
Foreground image  
The menu changes to the auto chroma key menu (T1ACR).  
Color matte key fill  
T1ACR  
Pos  
H
Pos  
V
Size  
– – AUTO  
CRK – –  
START  
–100-100  
F1  
–100-100  
F2  
0-100  
CANCEL  
1/1  
Composite image (program output)  
PAGE  
F3  
F4  
F5  
6
Turn the following knobs to adjust the cursor, to select the background  
color which is used as the reference color for chroma keying.  
To return from a color matte key fill to the foreground image, in page 2 of  
the chroma key menu (T1CRK) press the F4(FILL) button to select  
“VIDEO”.  
Cursor adjustment  
Move horizontally.  
Move vertically.  
Control knob  
F1(Pos H)  
F2(Pos V)  
F3(SIZE)  
Change the size.  
Notes  
• You can also adjust the cursor using the joystick and Z-knob in the  
LOCATION section.  
• If you press a button which is not related to auto chroma key  
operations, this automatically ends the auto chroma key mode.  
If there are variations in the background color  
Make the cursor as large as possible.  
7
Press the F5(START) button.  
This executes the auto chroma key, and a composite of the background  
and foreground images appears in the program monitor.  
3-38  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
Manual chroma key  
4
Watching the composite image on the program monitor, in page 1 of  
the chroma key menu, adjust the hue, clip, and gain.  
To combine the background image and foreground image by manual  
chroma keying, use the following procedure.  
When the background part of the foreground image is not  
completely replaced by the background image  
Adjust the hue with the F3(Hue) knob and the clip with the F1(Clip)  
knob.  
4
When the outline of the foreground image is not clear  
Adjust the clip with the F1(Clip) knob and the gain with the F2(Gain)  
knob.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
2
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
In combination with a luminance key  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
1
Press the PAGE button to display page 3 of the chroma key menu, then  
press the F1(LUM) button, setting the parameter to “ON”.  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
T1CRK  
LUM  
ON  
Clip  
Gain  
INVERT  
OFF  
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
0-100  
0-100  
INT  
VIDEO  
3/3  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
2
Watching the composite image on the program monitor, use the  
F2(Clip) knob to adjust the clip, and the F3(Gain) knob to adjust the  
gain. To leave dark portions, press the F4(INVERT) button, setting the  
parameter to “ON”.  
3
1
2
Using the same process as in steps 1 to 3 of the procedure for auto  
chroma keying (see page 3-37), select the background image,  
foreground image, and effect pattern.  
To switch between the composite image and the background  
image  
Press the CUT button. This toggles between the composite image and the  
background image.  
In the TITLE section of the menu control section, press the CRK  
button, turning it on.  
To fill the inserted text or image with a color matte (using a  
color matte as key fill)  
Use the same procedure as for an auto chroma key (see page 3-39).  
In the menu display page 1 of the chroma key menu appears. The  
following example appears when the CRK button in column 1 is lit.  
T1CRK  
Clip  
Gain  
Hue  
Angle  
AUTO  
0-100  
0-100  
0-99  
0-100  
1/3  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
3
Press the CUT button in the effect transition section.  
A composite of the foreground and background images appears in the  
program monitor.  
At this point, though, (before adjustment), either of the background  
image or foreground image may not be visible.  
3-40  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
4
Watching the composite image on the program monitor, turn the  
F3(Hue) and F2(Sat) knobs, until the boundary between the  
background image and foreground image provides a natural match of  
hue and saturation.  
Adjusting the hue range for chroma keying (the “angle” setting)  
If there are fluctuations in the background color in the foreground image, it  
may not be immediately possible to key the background image into the  
whole of the desired background. In this case, you can correct this by  
increasing the range of hues (the “angle” setting) used for chroma keying.  
(This means using a wider-angled sector of the hue circle.)  
Creating a composite image with a semi-transparent foreground image (density function)  
Angle setting (Example: using a blue background color)  
• Increasing the angle increases the range of hues replaced by the  
background image, including shades of cyan and magenta.  
• Decreasing the angle decreases the range of hues replaced by the  
background image, restricting it to closely-matching blues.  
You can make the inserted image semi-transparent, and insert it into the  
background image.  
Use the following procedure.  
1
In the TITLE section of the menu control section, press the CRK  
button, turning it on, to display page 2 of the chroma key menu.  
Note  
If the foreground image includes a color close to the “background” color in  
a position not intended to be replaced by the background image, then if  
you make the hue range too wide this part will also be filled by the  
background image (key fill).  
The following example appears when the CRK button in column 1 is  
lit.  
T1CRK  
COLCAN  
Sat  
Hue  
FILL  
Densty  
ON  
0-100  
0-99  
VIDEO  
0-100  
2/3  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Eliminating bleeding of colors into the edge of the inserted image (color cancel function)  
2
Watching the composite image on the program monitor, turn the  
F5(Densty) knob, to adjust the transparency of the inserted image.  
In a chroma key composite image, on the boundary of the inserted image,  
the “background” keying color in the foreground image (usually blue)  
tends to bleed into the boundary with the background image. In this case,  
by replacing the keying color in the composite image by another color (for  
example gray), the boundary is made to stand out less. This function is  
called “color cancel”.  
To use the color cancel function, use the following procedure.  
1
In the TITLE section of the menu control section, press the CRK  
button, turning it on, and display page 2 of the chroma key menu.  
The following example appears when the CRK button in column 1 is  
lit.  
T1CRK  
COLCAN  
ON  
Sat  
Hue  
0-99  
FILL  
Densty  
0-100  
0-100  
VIDEO  
2/3  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
2
3
In the effect transition section, press the TITLE button, turning it on,  
then press the CUT button.  
A composite of the foreground and background images appears in the  
program monitor.  
Press the F1(COLCAN) button, setting the parameter to “ON”.  
3-42  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (2) —  
Downstream Key  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (1) — Title Key  
Masking Part of a Title Key  
As its name implies, the downstream key (often abbreviated as DSK) is a  
key which is added downstream the title keying stages, to the already-  
formed composite image made up of the background and foreground  
images.  
You can apply a rectangular mask, to eliminate unwanted parts of the key.  
The masked part is filled with the background image.  
This operation is common to luminance and chroma keys.  
Background image  
Foreground image  
2
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
1
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
Key source signal  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
In the TITLE section of the menu control section, press one of the  
MASK buttons, turning it on.  
The mask menu appears in the menu display.  
The following example appears when the MASK button in column 1 is  
lit.  
Program output  
T1MSK  
Left  
Right  
Top  
Bottom  
INVERT  
OFF  
Note that if a preview monitor is connected, you can use it to preview the  
downstream key on the composite image by pressing the DSK PVW  
button in the fade-to-black/downstream key section.  
–400-400  
–400-400  
–300-300  
–300-300  
1/1  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Turn the F1(Left), F2(Right), F3(Top), and F4(Bottom) knobs to set  
the mask region.  
Removing the mask  
Press the MASK button lit in step 1, turning it off.  
To invert the mask  
In the mask menu, press the F5(INVERT) button, setting it to “ON”.  
3-44  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (2) — Downstream Key  
3
Select the downstream key fill signal.  
1) Press the PAGE button, and switch to page 1 of the downstream  
key menu.  
Procedure  
To insert a downstream key, use the following procedure.  
DSK  
Clip  
Gain  
INVERT  
OFF  
FILL  
Densty  
0-100  
For details of key source and key fill signal connections, see the section “Key  
Signal Connections” (page 6-3).  
0-100  
0-100  
VIDEO  
1/2  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
2) Press the F4(FILL) button, to select the signal used as the key fill  
signal.  
2
3
4
VIDEO: Use the signal specified as “DSK FILL” in the delegation  
section. When you select this, press the DSK FILL button in the  
delegation section, turning it on, then select the desired bus with  
the AUXILIARY buttons.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
DSKMAT: Use an internal DSK matte signal.  
NONE: Do not use a key fill signal (applying the border only).  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
1
5
Note  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
When you select “NONE”, DSK border automatically goes on. If you  
now forcibly turn the DSK border off, the downstream key will not  
appear.  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
4
5
Set the downstream key transition time (the time taken to insert the  
key).  
For an instantaneous insert, set the transition time to zero.  
1
For details of the setting, see the section “Setting the Transition Time” (page  
3-51).  
1
2
First create the image into which the downstream key is to be inserted.  
1) Select the background and foreground images.  
Press the DSK button to insert the downstream key.  
2) Select the effect, and create the desired composite image.  
When the downstream key has been inserted, the DSK button lights  
red.  
During the transition, the DSK button lights amber.  
Select the key source signal for the downstream key.  
1) In the DSK section of the menu control section, press the LUM  
button, turning it on, and display page 2 of the downstream key  
(DSK) menu.  
Note  
DSK  
SOURCE  
Downstream keys are always delayed by 6H.  
EXT  
2/2  
PAGE  
F1  
Deleting the downstream key  
When the DSK button is lit red, press it, turning it off.  
2) Press the F1(Source) button, and select the signal to be used as the  
key signal.  
Adjusting the outline of the downstream key  
If the outline of the inserted text or graphics is not sharp, in page 1 of the  
downstream key menu, adjust the F1(Clip) and F2(Gain) knobs as follows.  
• To adjust the degree to which the key is cut out, turn the F1(Clip) knob  
to adjust the clip level.  
EXT: Use the signal input to the DSK KEY IN connector (external  
key mode).  
SELF: Use the signal specified as “DSK FILL” in the delegation  
section (self-keying mode).  
• To adjust the sharpness of outline of the key, turn the F2(Gain) knob to  
adjust the key gain.  
3-46  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (2) — Downstream Key  
To invert the downstream key source signal  
Depending on the desired sense of the key source signal (whether the  
white or black portions form the key), in page 1 of the downstream key  
menu make the following setting.  
• For white lettering on a black background, press the F3(INVERT)  
button, setting it to “OFF”.  
2
3
Press the F1(TYPE) button, to select the border type.  
Wide: wide border  
Narrow: narrow border  
Drop: drop border  
Double: double border (combination of drop and narrow borders)  
• For black lettering on a white background, press the F3(INVERT)  
button, setting it to “ON”.  
If you selected drop border or double border, you can now specify the  
border position with the F2 button.  
DSK  
TYPE  
POS  
+
R
Double  
T
1/1  
Applying a border to a downstream key  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
You can apply a border to the text or graphics inserted as a downstream  
key, and adjust the border color.  
If in step 2 you selected drop border or double border, press the  
F2(POS) button to specify the border position.  
For details of adjusting the border color, see the section “Adjusting Color  
Mattes” (page 3-57).  
Each time you press the button it cycles to the next in the sequence  
“T+L” (top and left)” t “T+R” (top and right)” t “B+R” (bottom  
and right) t “B+L” (bottom and left).  
To apply a border to a downstream key, use the following procedure.  
To remove the border  
In the DSK section of the menu control section, press the BORDER  
button, turning it off.  
1
2
3
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
In the DSK section of the menu control section, press the BORDER  
button, turning it on.  
The downstream key border setting menu (DSK)appears.  
DSK  
TYPE  
Double  
1/1  
PAGE  
F1  
3-48  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Inserting Characters and Graphics (2) — Downstream Key  
To mask a part of the downstream key  
Setting Up a Transition  
This section describes how to set the transition time and transition  
direction.  
You can mask out unwanted portions of a downstream key (text or  
graphics).  
Setting the Transition Time  
To use the mask function, use the following procedure.  
The transition time measures the duration of an effect in frames (1/30  
second (NTSC) or 1/25 second (PAL)), ranging from 0 to 999 frames.  
In this system, you can set the transition time for a downstream key or  
fade-to-black independently of the transition time for an effect.  
1
2
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
Procedure  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
To set the transition time, use the following procedure.  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
1
2
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
1
1
2
In the DSK section of the menu control section, press the MASK  
button, turning it on.  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
3
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENER  
The mask menu (DKMSK) appears in the menu display.  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
DKMSK  
Left  
Right  
Top  
Bottom  
INVERT  
OFF  
–400-400  
–400-400  
–300-300  
–300-300  
1/1  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Turn the F1(Left), F2(Right), F3(Top), and F4(Bottom) knobs to set  
the mask region.  
1
2
Press the SET button in the effect transition section until the  
appropriate display window mode indicator (EFFECT, DSK, or FTB)  
is lit.  
Removing the mask  
Press the MASK button lit in step 1, turning it off.  
EFFECT: for setting the effect transition time  
DSK: for setting the downstream key transition time  
FTB: for setting the fade-to-black transition time  
To invert the mask  
In the mask menu, press the F5(INVERT) button, setting the parameter to  
“ON”.  
Note  
If the EDIT button in the user program section is lit, it is not possible  
to set the transition time. Press the EDIT button, turning it off.  
With buttons 0 to 9 in the pattern/numeric keypad, enter the desired  
transition time (0 to 999 frames).  
The value entered appears in the TRANS RATE display window, and  
dots appear to the lower right of the digits. You can use the UP and  
DOWN buttons to adjust the value.  
(continued)  
3-50  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting Up a Transition  
3
Press the ENTER button.  
Operation of transition effects  
The dots to the lower right of the digits disappear, confirming the  
transition time.  
The following figure illustrates the execution of an example transition  
effect. In the figure, “B” is the background image and “F” the foreground  
image.  
If you make a mistake entering the time  
Before pressing the ENTER button press the P IN P/RST button to return  
the display to the last confirmed value, then enter the correct time.  
Operation in the normal direction (REV button off)  
Pattern number 1630  
B
B
B
F
F
Setting the Transition Direction  
Transition effects are normally executed in the direction in which the  
Operation in the reverse direction (REV button on)  
Pattern number 1630  
foreground image enters (forwards, or “normal”). To reverse the direction,  
before executing the transition, press the REV button in the effect  
transition section, turning it on.  
Pressing the REV button once more turns it off, and reverts to the normal  
direction.  
F
B
F
If you have selected an animation effect, the N/R button lights, and the  
normal and reverse directions are used alternately. Each time an effect  
completes, the REV button goes on or off alternately.  
For the direction of operation of other transition effects, see the section “Effect  
Motion Types” (page A-21).  
N/R button  
REV button  
Operation of animation effects  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
The following figure illustrates the execution of an example animation  
effect. In the figure, “B” is the background image and “F” the foreground  
image.  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
Operation in the normal direction (REV button off)  
Pattern number 1100  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
B
F
2
RST  
B
F
FOREGROUND  
B
F
F
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Operation in the reverse direction (REV button on)  
Pattern number 1100  
B
F
B
F
B
For the direction of operation of other animation effects, see the section “Effect  
Motion Types” (page A-21).  
3-52  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Executing an Effect  
To execute an effect, after setting the execution direction (normal/reverse),  
in the effect transition section press the AUTO TRANS button, or move  
the fader lever.  
Using the AUTO TRANS button  
To execute the effect automatically at the preset transition time, press the  
AUTO TRANS button, turning it on.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
To pause the transition  
During the transition, press the AUTO TRANS button, turning it off.  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
Note  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
If the fader lever is in an intermediate position, then the transition pauses  
at the corresponding position. To make sure the transition does not pause,  
first move the fader lever to either end of its travel.  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
To resume the transition  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Press the AUTO TRANS button again.  
Fader lever  
AUTO TRANS button  
Using the fader lever and AUTO TRANS button together  
You can use the AUTO TRANS button to complete a transition started and  
paused with the fader lever, or in the opposite way, use the fader lever to  
complete a transition started and paused with the AUTO TRANS button.  
• If you resume a transition partially executed with the fader lever, using  
the AUTO TRANS button, then the transition time taken is in proportion  
to the setting for the entire transition. For example, if the transition time  
is set to 100 frames, and you carry out the equivalent of 25 frames with  
the fader lever, then press the AUTO TRANS button, the remainder of  
the transition will take 75 frames.  
Using the fader lever  
By moving the fader lever from one end of its travel to the other at any  
desired speed, you can manually control the transition.  
The transition indicator on the left of the fader lever lights progressively  
corresponding to the status of the transition. When the transition  
completes, the transition indicator goes completely off.  
• If you partially execute the transition with the AUTO TRANS button,  
then start moving the fader lever, the transition resumes when the fader  
lever reaches the corresponding intermediate position.  
For an effect in which the image switches like a cut, the transition occurs  
when the fader lever is in the center position.  
Note  
Note  
After powering on the system, move the fader lever once through the  
whole of its travel. This will ensure that the fader lever operates correctly.  
When you carry out an auto transition by controlling the processor unit  
from an external editor through the EDITOR connector, then regardless of  
the fader lever position, the transition is executed in its entirety.  
To pause the transition  
Stop moving the fader lever.  
To resume the transition  
Start moving the fader lever again.  
3-54  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Executing an Effect  
Adjusting Color Mattes  
You can adjust the color of each color matte individually, and also copy  
parameters from other color mattes.  
Checking the direction and state of progress of the transition  
Whether you are carrying out the effect manually or automatically, the  
transition indicator on the left of the fader lever (20 LEDs) shows the state  
of progress of the transition.  
When you start the transition, the indicator lights progressively in the  
direction of the transition, and goes off when the transition completes.  
If you pause the transition, the indicator remains on in the corresponding  
position.  
Procedure  
To adjust a color matte, use the following procedure.  
You can always complete a paused transition by moving the fader lever in  
the direction of the unlit indicator segments.  
1
2
3
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
Direction of progress of  
transition  
Direction of moving  
fader lever  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Transition indicator  
Of the 20 LEDs, ten are lit, showing that the  
transition is one-half completed.  
1
2
Press the MATTES button in the menu control section, to display page  
1 of the MATTE menu.  
MATTE  
SELECT  
Lum  
Sat  
Hue  
0-99  
CH2BRD  
BRDMAT  
INT  
V
0-100  
0-100  
1/2  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
Press the F1(SELECT) button, to select the color matte to adjust.  
INT V (internal video): color matte used for foreground and  
background images  
BORD (border): color matte used to fill the border applied to an  
effect pattern, and as key fill for a title key  
EFFECT: general-purpose color matte for use in effects  
SHADOW: color matte used for shadows around an input image (fill)  
DSKFL (DSK fill): color matte used as key fill for a downstream key  
DSKBD (DSK border): color matte used for a downstream key border  
FTB: color matte used in place of black in the fade-to-black function  
3
Turn the F2(Lum), F3(Sat), and F4(Hue) knobs, to adjust the  
luminance, saturation, and hue.  
Note  
If you vary the luminance of a color matte signal with high saturation,  
the saturation is automatically adjusted so as not to go outside the  
signal specifications.  
3-56  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adjusting Color Mattes  
Adjusting Image Colors — Color Correction  
To copy a matte color  
To copy the color matte parameters from another color matte, use the  
following procedure.  
The color correction function allows you to adjust the overall color balance  
of images, or correct the white balance for different lighting color  
temperatures.  
You can apply color correction to the signal input to any one of the  
primary input connectors (VIDEO INPUT 1 to 8).  
1
Press the MATTES button in the menu control section, to display page  
2 of the MATTE menu. (Press the PAGE button to change pages.)  
Notes  
MATTE  
FROM  
TO  
COPY  
EXEC  
INTVID  
Matte  
PTN  
1
• Color correction settings cannot be saved in a snapshot.  
• The color correction function cannot be used for the effect patterns  
numbered 2261, 2264, 2267, 2269, and 2279.  
INT  
V
BORD  
2/2  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
2
3
Press the F1(FROM) button, to select the color matte to be copied.  
Press the F2(TO) button, to select the color matte to which you want to  
make the copy.  
Procedure  
To adjust the color balance with the color correction function, use the  
following procedure.  
4
Press the F3(COPY) button, to carry out the copy.  
3
4
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
GPI  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
1
2
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
Press the CCR button in the delegation section, turning it on.  
Press one of the AUXILIARY buttons, turning it on, to select the bus  
to which the color adjustment applies.  
3
Press the CCR button in the menu control section, turning it on, to  
display the color correction menu (CCR).  
CCR  
Gain  
Hue  
0-99  
Offset  
0-100  
HueRot  
0-99  
Gamma  
0-100  
0-100  
1/1  
PAGE  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
(continued)  
3-58  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Freezing an Input Image — Frame Memory  
Function  
Adjusting Image Colors — Color Correction  
4
Watching the image on the monitor, turn the F1 to F5 knobs to adjust  
the color.  
Using the frame memory function, you can capture a “freeze frame” from  
input video or store a still frame. You can then use this still image as a  
video source.  
F1(Gain): adjust the chrominance gain (the depth of the colors).  
F2(Hue): adjust the hue.  
Procedure  
Note  
When F3(Offset) is set to its minimum value of zero, turning the  
F2(Hue) knob has no effect on the hue.  
To capture a freeze frame in memory, use the following procedure.  
F3(Offset): vary the adjustment range of the F2(Hue) knob.  
The larger the value of “Offset,” the wider the range of color  
adjustment. A smaller value for “Offset” means that the F2(Hue)  
knob can be used for fine adjustment.  
2 5 1,6  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
F4(HueRot): set the hue.  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
F5(Gamma): adjust the gamma value of the luminance signal.  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
To turn off the color correction function  
In the menu control section press the CCR button, turning it off.  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
3
4
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMRY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
3
If the FREEZ button is lit, press it, turning it off.  
In the delegation section press the MEMORY button, turning it on.  
Press one of the AUXILIARY buttons, turning it on, to select the input  
video signal.  
4
5
Press the MEMORY button in the BACKGROUND bus button row,  
turning it on.  
• To capture a frame from still video, press the FRAME button turning  
it on.  
• To capture a field from moving video, leave the FRAME button off.  
(Pressing the FRAME button toggles it on and off.)  
6
Press the FREEZ button, turning it on, to capture the image. (For  
capture from a moving video input, press the FREEZ button at the  
point you want to capture.)  
The captured image appears on the output bus, and is written to  
memory.  
Note  
Even if other than MEMORY is selected on the BACKGROUND bus  
buttons, you can still capture the selected image with an AUXILIARY  
button.  
3-60  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Freezing an Input Image — Frame Memory Function  
Fade-to-Black  
Recalling a freeze frame saved in memory  
In the BACKGROUND or FOREGROUND bus button row, press  
The fade-to-black allows you to gradually fade the image on the preview  
monitor (the background image) until it is completely black.  
MEMORY, turning it on.  
To carry out a fade-to-black  
Note  
When the unit is powered off, the saved frame is lost from memory.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
INS  
BLACK  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
FADE TO BLACK button  
Press the FADE TO BLACK button in the fade-to-black/downstream key  
section.  
During the transition, the FADE TO BLACK button lights amber, and  
when the transition completes (when the image is completely black), lights  
red.  
To end a fade-to-black  
When the FADE TO BLACK button is lit red (the screen is black), press  
the FADE TO BLACK button. The output gradually changes from black to  
the image selected on the BACKGROUND bus buttons.  
To reverse the direction of a fade-to-black transition during  
execution  
During the transition (while the FADE TO BLACK button is lit amber),  
press the FADE TO BLACK button.  
This immediately reverses the direction of the transition.  
Setting the fade-to-black transition time  
Follow the procedure in the section “Setting the Transition Time” (page 3-  
51).  
To change the color from black  
Follow the procedure in the section “Adjusting Color Mattes” (page 3-57).  
To prohibit a fade-to-black  
See F4 in the section “Control Panel Setup (page 5/8)” (page 6-10).  
3-62  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
Chapter 3 Basic Operation  
3-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter  
4
Advanced Operations  
Changing Direct Pattern Assignments  
You can change the effect patterns assigned to the buttons 0 to 9 and  
P IN P/RST. Doing so allows you to select frequently used patterns simply  
by pressing the corresponding buttons in direct pattern selection mode.  
To change the direct pattern assignment  
To change the direct pattern assignment to the buttons 0 to 9 and P IN P/  
RST, use the following procedure.  
PATTERN NUMBER display window  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
1
4
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
4
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENR  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
2,4 3  
1
Press the SET button.  
The button lights, and the unit enters pattern number entry mode.  
(continued)  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing Direct Pattern Assignments  
User Program Effects  
2
Use buttons 0 to 9 to enter the pattern number you want to assign to a  
button.  
In addition to the internal effect patterns, you can also create user-  
customized effect patterns. These are referred to as “user program effects.”  
With standard equipment you can save a maximum of 40 effects. You use  
these effect patterns in the same way as the internal patterns, using the  
assigned number.  
For more information about pattern numbers, see the section “Effect Pattern  
Image List” (page A-29).  
The number you enter appears in the PATTERN NUMBER display  
window.  
Constructing a User Program Effect  
3
4
Press the ENTER button.  
You build a user program effect from key frames, which show an outline  
of the animation.  
While holding down the DIRECT PATTERN button, press the button  
(0 to 9, or P IN P/RST) to which you want to assign the pattern.  
A user effect can consist of up to eight key frames, numbered from 1 to 8.  
When you execute the effect, it runs through the key frames in sequence,  
starting from the highest numbered, and ending on key frame 1.  
Therefore, when creating the effect you save the movement in the reverse  
direction (with the image selected on the foreground bus moving outside  
the screen).  
The button you pressed lights, and the pattern number entered in step 2  
is assigned to the button.  
By pressing the REVERSE button, turning it on, you can execute the effect  
in the reverse order of the created key frames. You can adjust the interval  
between key frames by a menu setting.  
To restore the default assignments (direct pattern reinitialization)  
After changing pattern assignments, you can restore the factory default  
When you execute a user program effect, the interval between key frames  
is automatically interpolated using spline curves, producing a smooth  
effect. You can also adjust the smoothness of the spline curves (i.e. the  
movement) when executing the effect.  
assignments shown in “Example Effects” (page 3-18).  
To return all of the buttons 0 to 9 and P IN P/RST to their factory default  
assignments, use the following procedure.  
1
Press the SET UP button.  
The setup menu appears.  
2
3
4
5
Press the PAGE button to display page 6/8.  
Press the F4(KEYPAD) button to set it to “ON”.  
Press the F5(EXEC) button.  
Key frame 1  
Key frame 2  
Effect created by interpolation  
Key frame 1  
Key  
frame 2  
Press the F3(OK) button.  
This returns all of the assignments to the 0 to 9 and P IN P/RST buttons  
to their factory default settings.  
If you execute a user program effect that consists of a single key frame, the  
result is that the foreground image appears against the background image,  
subjected only to the effect defined for key frame 1.  
4-2  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
Types of User Program Effect  
Modification Parameters  
There are four types of user program effects. The four types must be  
registered saved in the pattern number ranges shown below.  
You can adjust key frames, using the effect control section and location  
section to set the parameters described on pages 4-6 and 4-7.  
• If you specify a linear user program effect number, the following three  
pages appear in the menu display.  
Page 1/3: Rot-X, Rot-Y, Rot-Z, Pers  
Page 2/3: Loc-X, Loc-Y, Loc-Z, KfDur  
You can control Loc-X, Loc-Y, and Loc-Z from the location  
section.  
Effect type  
Pattern number  
Linear  
Transition  
Animation  
Transition  
Animation  
9000 to 9009  
9100 to 9109  
9200 to 9209  
9300 to 9309  
Nonlinear  
Page 3/3: key frame temporary storage  
Linear: effects built from rotation, magnification, and movement of the  
x-, y-, and z-axes  
• If you specify a nonlinear user program effect number, the following  
three pages appear in the menu display.  
Page 1/3: Angle, Offset, Rot-Z, Radius, FORM  
Page 2/3: Loc-X, Loc-Y, Loc-Z, KfDur  
You can control Loc-X, Loc-Y, and Loc-Z from the location  
section.  
For details of the modification parameters, see page 4-6.  
Nonlinear: modifications of the page turn, page roll, and sphere effects,  
together with z-axis rotation, magnification, and movement  
For details of the modification parameters, see page 4-7.  
Transition effects: effects which accomplish a transition from one scene  
to another. After the effect completes, the background image (B) and  
foreground image (F) are interchanged.  
Page 3/3: key frame temporary storage  
Menu display  
Control knobs  
F
B
Location section  
Key frame 1  
Key frame 2  
Key frame 3  
Key frame 4  
Example of a transition user program effect  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
When you execute an effect saved as shown above in the “normal”  
direction (with the REV button off), the key frames go in the sequence  
from 4 to 1.  
Animation effects: effects in which the foreground image (F) remains on  
the background image (B). You can vary the shape of the foreground  
image, or move it about the screen.  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
F
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
F
B
F
Key frame 1  
Key frame 2  
Key frame 3  
Key frame 4  
Example of an animation user program effect  
When you execute an animation effect saved as shown above in the  
“normal” direction (with the REV button off), again the key frames go in  
the sequence from 4 to 1.  
4-4  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
Parameters for linear user program effects (9000 to 9009 and 9100 to 9109)  
Parameters for nonlinear user program effects (9200 to 9209 and 9300 to 9309)  
Impression of parameter adjustment  
Controls and parameters  
Impression of parameter adjustment  
Controls and parameters  
Joystick, Loc-X knob  
Movement along x-axis  
Joystick, Loc-X knob  
Movement along x-axis  
Joystick, Loc-Y knob  
Movement along y-axis  
Joystick, Loc-Y knob  
Movement along y-axis  
Location section, Z-knob  
Loc-Z knob  
Magnification  
Location section, Z-knob, Loc-Z knob  
Magnification  
Angle knob  
Rot-X knob  
Direction of folding  
Rotation about the x-axis  
OFFSET knob  
Degree of modification  
Rot-Y knob  
Rotation about the y-axis  
Rot-Z knob  
Rotation about the z-axis  
Rot-Z knob  
Rotation about the z-axis  
Radius knob  
Tightness of winding  
Pers knob  
Perspective adjustment  
FORM (F5 button)  
Type of modification  
KfDur  
Time interval from one key frame to the next. (Not valid for key frame 1)  
(See page 4-9.)  
4-6  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
Displaying parameter values  
About the key frame duration  
The numerical values of the parameters appear in the menu.  
The KfDur value (key frame duration) for key frame n corresponds to the  
interval between key frame n and key frame n+1. Therefore, if the settings  
are as follows:  
Numerical parameter values  
Parameter Function  
Value range  
–800 to +800a)  
–600 to +600b)  
0 to 200  
Default  
Key frame 1 ... not effective  
Key frame 2 ... KfDur 100  
Key frame 3 ... KfDur 50  
Key frame 4 ... KfDur 50  
Loc-X  
Loc-Y  
Loc-Z  
KfDur  
Rot-X  
Rot-Y  
Rot-Z  
Pers  
Movement along x-axis  
0
Movement along y-axis  
Magnification  
0
100  
50  
0
Key frame duration  
Rotation about the x-axis  
Rotation about the y-axis  
Rotation about the z-axis  
Perspective  
1 to 100  
–400 to +400 c)  
–400 to +400 c)  
–400 to +400c)  
0 to 400  
The interval between key frames 1 and 2 is twice that between the other  
pairs of frames. For example, if the transition duration is set to 100 frames,  
the transition will proceed as follows:  
0
0
200  
20  
0
Angle  
Offset  
Rot-Z  
Radius  
FORM  
Direction of folding  
Degree of modification  
Rotation about the z-axis  
Radius  
–100 to +100c)  
Key frame 4 t 3 ... 25 frames  
Key frame 3 t 2 ... 25 frames  
Key frame 2 t 1 ... 50 frames  
0 to 200  
–400 to +400c)  
0 to 100  
TURN, ROLL, SPHEREd)  
0
0
Type of modification  
TURN  
Setting the type of interpolation  
a) 600 corresponds to the full width of the screen.  
b) 300 corresponds to the full height of the screen.  
c) 100 corresponds to 360 degrees.  
When executing the effect, using the F1 button in the menu, you can set  
the type of interpolation between key frames as follows:  
d) For SPHERE, the Angle and the Radius parameter do not function.  
Lin: linear interpolation  
S-Lin: S-curve interpolation  
Spln: spline interpolation  
Resetting the parameters to their initial values  
• To reset all of the parameters, hold down the INITIAL button, and press  
the PATTERN ADJ button.  
V-Spln: parameterized spline interpolation  
The initial values of the parameters are for an unmodified image  
occupying the whole screen.  
• To reset all of the parameters on a particular page, hold down the  
INITIAL button, and press the PAGE button.  
If you select V-Spln, with the F2(Tens) knob you can adjust the tension of  
the spline curve in the range –100 to +100. This controls the smoothness,  
with the initial value 0 and –100 giving the smoothest result.  
• To reset a particular parameter only, press the corresponding function  
button while holding down the INITIAL button.  
4-8  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
4
Press the EDIT button.  
Creating New User Program Effects  
The button lights, the system enters user program edit mode, and the  
monitor shows the image (key frame 1) selected on the  
To create a new user program effect, use the following procedure.  
FOREGROUND bus buttons. This is because for a new effect, key  
frame 1 is saved as an unmodified, full-screen foreground.  
STATUS display window  
EDIT display window  
5
6
In the menu, set the parameters, and create key frame 2.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
When creating a transition effect, see the section “Notes on creating a  
transition user program effect” below.  
4,7  
1
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
5
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
When you have the image you want to save, press the LAST X/INS  
button.  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
6
2
3
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
This creates key frame 2 with the parameters set in step 5, and saves  
the key frame after key frame 1. A “2” appears in the EDIT display  
window and STATUS display window.  
If this is an animation effect, instead of the LAST X/INS button, you  
can press the ENTER button to save the key frame created with the  
parameters set in step 5 as key frame 1 (thus modifying key frame 1).  
This is because an animation effect is allowed to have key frame 1  
different from an unmodified foreground image.  
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
PATTERN NUMBER display window  
1
2
Press the SET button.  
By repeating steps 5 and 6 (making parameter settings and adding key  
frame with the LAST X/INS button), you can create the required  
sequence of key frame (maximum eight).  
Using the numeric buttons, enter the pattern number of the user  
program effect to be created.  
The STATUS display window shows the number of saved key frames.  
If you enter a number outside the user program effect range, an audible  
warning sounds in step 4. (The warning sounds only if the item  
BEEPER on page 5 of the setup menu is set to ON.)  
7
When you have saved all the required key frames, press the EDIT  
button once more.  
Effect type  
Pattern number  
9000 to 9009  
9100 to 9109  
9200 to 9209  
9300 to 9309  
The button goes off, and the created user program effect is now ready  
to be used.  
Linear  
Transition  
Animation  
Transition  
Animation  
Nonlinear  
Notes on creating a transition user program effect  
• Make key frame 1 an unmodified full-screen image. (In a new pattern,  
key frame 1 is automatically saved as a full-screen image.)  
• In the last key frame, make the background image completely disappear.  
(Either make it of zero size, or move it outside the screen area.) This will  
make the created effect smoother.  
The number you entered appears in the PATTERN NUMBER display  
window.  
• For the linear PERS parameter and the nonlinear FORM parameter, the  
key frames must all have the same value. The value saved in the last key  
frame is used for all key frames.  
3
Press the ENTER button.  
The STATUS display window should show “1”. If it shows any value  
other than “1” this means that there are already a number of key frames  
assigned to this number.  
4-10  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
To change the key frame parameters  
Editing User Program Effects  
After carrying out the procedure to step 4 in the section “To recall a user  
program effect” above, use the following procedure.  
You can recall a created user program effect, and change its parameters, or  
add, delete, or copy key frames.  
5
Press the UP or DOWN button in the pattern/numeric keypad, so that  
the number of the key frame for which you want to change the  
parameters appears in the EDIT display window.  
STATUS display window  
EDIT display window  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
6
7
Change the parameters in the menu.  
Press the ENTER button.  
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
4,8  
1
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
6
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
This saves the changed key frame parameters.  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Repeat steps 5, 6, and 7, to change the key frame parameters in all  
desired key frames in turn.  
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
MEMORY  
CUT  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
2
3,7  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
8
When all the changes are made, EDIT button.  
The button goes off, and the modified user program effect is resaved.  
5
To recall a user program effect  
Use the following procedure.  
1
2
Press the SET button.  
Use buttons 0 to 9 to enter the user program effect number.  
The number you entered appears in the PATTERN NUMBER display  
window.  
3
4
Press the ENTER button.  
The STATUS display window shows the number of key frames in the  
user program effect you specified in step 2.  
Press the EDIT button.  
The button lights, and the editing screen for the user program effect  
you specified in step 2 (the image selected on the FOREGROUND bus  
buttons) appears.  
The STATUS display window shows the number of key frames saved  
in the user program effect.  
4-12  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
Adding a key frame  
8
When you have added all the key frames, press the EDIT button.  
The button goes off, and the user program effect is resaved with the  
added key frames.  
Example: Adding a key frame after key frame 3  
Undefined key frames  
Deleting a key frame  
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Example: Deleting key frame 3  
STATUS display window = 5  
EDIT display window = 3  
Key frame to delete  
C’  
Undefined key frames  
Adding a key frame (before addition)  
A
B
C
D
E
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
After carrying out the procedure to step 4 in the section “To recall a user  
program effect” on the page 4-12, use the following procedure.  
STATUS display window = 5  
EDIT display window = 3  
5
Press the UP or DOWN button in the pattern/numeric keypad, so that  
the number of the key frame before where you want to insert the new  
frame (key frame 3 in the example above) appears in the EDIT display  
window.  
Deleting a key frame (before deletion)  
After carrying out the procedure to step 4 in the section “To recall a user  
program effect” on the page 4-12, use the following procedure.  
6
7
Set the parameters in the menu.  
Press the LAST X/INS button.  
5
6
Press the UP or DOWN button in the pattern/numeric keypad, so that  
the number of the key frame you want to delete (key frame 3 in the  
example above) appears in the EDIT display window.  
This inserts a new key frame with the parameters you set in step 6 after  
the key frame specified in step 5, and the number of key frames shown  
in the STATUS display window increases by 1.  
Press the DEL button. (To prevent you from inadvertently deleting a  
key frame, you must hold the button down for at least 0.5 seconds.)  
An alarm sounds, and the key frame you specified in step 5 is deleted.  
The number of key frames shown in the STATUS display window  
decreases by 1.  
Example: Adding a key frame after key frame 3  
Undefined key frames  
Example: Deleting key frame 3  
A
1
B
2
C
3
C'  
4
D
5
E
6
Undefined key frames  
7
8
STATUS display window = 6  
EDIT display window = 4  
A
1
B
2
D
3
E
4
5
6
7
8
Adding a key frame (after addition)  
STATUS display window = 4  
EDIT display window = 3  
Repeat steps 5 to 7 as required to add more key frames.  
Deleting a key frame (after deletion)  
Repeat steps 5 and 6 as required to delete more key frames.  
(continued)  
4-14  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
7
When you have deleted all the desired key frames, press the EDIT  
button.  
Copying a key frame  
You can use the temporary assignment function to copy data from one key  
frame to another.  
Use the following procedure.  
The button goes off, and the user program effect is resaved without the  
deleted key frames.  
1
2
Recall the user program effect you want to copy from, and press the  
EDIT button, turning it on.  
Temporarily saving key frame data (temporary assignment function)  
While editing user program effects, you can temporarily assign key frame  
For details see “To recall a user program effect” (page 4-12).  
data to keypad numeric buttons. This makes it easy to recall the data for  
use in changing or adding key frames. You can save 10 sets of data each  
for linear and nonlinear effects, for a total of 20 key frames.  
Press the UP or DOWN button in the pattern/numeric keypad until the  
number of the key frame you want to copy from appears in the EDIT  
display window.  
To save key frame data  
Use the following procedure.  
3
4
Display page 3/3 of the menu.  
1
2
3
4
Press the EDIT button to switch to user program edit mode.  
Adjust the parameters in the menu, to create the key frame.  
Display page 3/3 of the menu.  
Hold down the F1(CpTo+) button, and press a numeric button in the  
pattern/numeric keypad.  
The indication for the selected number in the menu changes from “–”  
to “*”, and this saves the key frame temporarily.  
Hold down the F1(CpTo+) button, and press a numeric button in the  
pattern/numeric keypad.  
5
6
Press the EDIT button, turning it off, and exit user program edit mode.  
Recall the user program effect to which you want to copy, and press  
the EDIT button, turning it on.  
The indication for the selected number in the menu changes from “–”  
to “*”, and this saves the key frame temporarily.  
Note  
To recall a key frame  
Use the following procedure.  
The copy destination must be a user program effect of the same type  
(linear or nonlinear) as the copy source.  
1
2
3
Press the EDIT button to switch to user program edit mode.  
Display page 3/3 of the menu.  
7
Press the UP or DOWN button in the pattern/numeric keypad, until the  
number of the key frame you want to copy to appears in the EDIT  
display window.  
Hold down the F2(CpFrm+) button, and press a numeric button in the  
pattern/numeric keypad.  
8
9
In page 3/3 of the menu, hold down the F2(CpFrm+) button, and press  
the numeric button in which you saved the key frame in step 4.  
This recalls the temporarily saved key frame.  
Press the ENTER button.  
This copies the key frame data to the destination.  
Notes  
• You cannot use a linear key frame in a nonlinear effect, nor a nonlinear  
key frame in a linear effect.  
10When the copy is completed, press the EDIT button, turning it off.  
• The key frames temporarily saved in numeric buttons are lost when the  
DFS-700/700P is powered off.  
4-16  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
User Program Effects  
Executing User Program Effects  
Deleting All User Program Effects  
You execute a user program effect in the same way as a built-in effect, by  
To delete all user program effects, use the following procedure.  
entering the pattern number.  
Transitions between the key frames in user program effect are smooth  
because spline interpolation is used to generate intermediate effects. You  
can control the smoothness of transitions by adjusting the spline curve.  
To execute a user program effect, use the following procedure. Except for  
step 4, the procedure is the same as for executing a built-in effect by  
specifying the pattern number.  
1
Press the SET UP button.  
The setup menu appears.  
2
3
4
Press the PAGE button, to display page 6/8.  
Press the F4(USRPGM) button, to set it to “ON”.  
Press the F5(EXEC) button.  
STATUS display window  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
A confirmation message appears.  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
5
To go ahead and delete all user program effects, press F3(OK); to  
cancel press F5(CANCEL).  
4
1
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
2
5
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
When you press F3, all of the saved user program effects are deleted.  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
8
CUT  
3,5  
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTER  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
6
1
2
3
Select the background and foreground images.  
Press the SET button.  
In the pattern/numeric keypad, enter the user program effect number  
with buttons 0 to 9 and press ENTER.  
The STATUS display window shows the number of key frames in the  
effect.  
4
If necessary, use F1 button and F2 knob to adjust the smoothness of  
the transition.  
5
6
Set the duration and direction of the transition as required.  
Execute the effect with the fader lever or AUTO TRANS button.  
4-18  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Snapshots  
This unit’s snapshot function allows you to save the control panel state,  
and recall it whenever necessary.  
Saving a Snapshot  
You can save up to one hundred control panel states in snapshot registers  
in the processor numbered from 0 to 99.  
To save a snapshot, use the following procedure.  
When you recall a saved snapshot, the control panel settings all change  
automatically.  
The following are the settings which you can save in a snapshot.  
Note  
The unit is shipped with snapshots saved in registers 0 to 99. By carrying  
out the following procedure you overwrite these settings.  
Operational section  
Settings  
Primary cross-point bus  
section  
Signal selected by the FOREGROUND bus buttons  
Signal selected by the BACKGROUND bus buttons  
Signal selected by the TITLE1 SOURCE bus button  
Signal selected by the TITLE2 SOURCE bus button  
Signal selected by the DSK FILL bus button  
Signal selected by the SUPER BG bus button  
Signal selected by the FRGD 2 bus button  
Signal selected by the MEMORY bus button  
Transition time  
SNAP SHOT number display  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
2
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
DSK  
FTB  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
CCR  
TITLE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
SOURCE SOURCE  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Effect transition section  
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
CUT  
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
P
IN  
P
DSK  
Transition direction (REVERSE button setting)  
FRAME button setting  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTR  
AUTO  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
TRANS  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
Pattern/numeric keypad  
LIGHTING section  
TITLE section  
Specified pattern number  
All settings  
All settings  
1
MATTES section  
DSK section  
Color matte colors  
All settings  
Effect control section  
EDGE section  
User modifiable effect parameter settings  
All settings  
1
2
Set the buttons and controls on the control panel so that it is configured  
to the state you want to save.  
Location section  
All settings  
Press the LEARN button.  
Note  
The button lights, and the pattern/numeric keypad is ready to accept a  
snapshot number.  
The color corrector settings and fader lever position are not saved in a  
snapshot.  
3
4
With the buttons 0 to 9, enter the snapshot number you want to save (0  
to 99).  
You can use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the number  
displayed.  
Press the ENTER button.  
This saves the current settings in the snapshot register.  
To cancel the snapshot saving operation  
In step 4, press the LEARN button instead of the ENTER button. The  
LEARN button goes out and the operation is canceled.  
4-20  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Snapshots  
Use the following procedure.  
Recalling a Snapshot  
1
In the pattern/numeric keypad, press the DIRECT RECALL button,  
turning it on.  
To recall a snapshot, use the following procedure.  
SNAP SHOT number display  
This switches to direct recall mode.  
USER PGM  
SNAP SHOT  
2
Press the one of buttons 0 to 9 corresponding to the snapshot you want  
to recall.  
TITLE  
DSK  
LUM  
EDGE  
1
2
STATUS EDIT  
EDITOR  
GPI  
LUM  
LUM  
TRAIL  
SHADOW  
2
1
CRK  
CRK  
BORDER BEVELD  
EDGE  
INITIAL  
EDIT  
LEARN  
SET UP  
SHIFT  
MASK  
CCR  
MASK  
MASK  
SOFT  
RECALL  
This recalls the snapshot.  
LIGHTING MATTES BORDER  
PATTERN PAGE  
ADJ  
LOCATION  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
EFFECT  
DSK  
FTB  
F5  
HOLD  
INPUT  
TRANS RATE  
PATTERN NUMBER  
SET  
SET  
To cancel the snapshot recall operation  
In step 4, press the LEARN button instead of the ENTER button. The  
LEARN button goes out and the operation is canceled.  
CCR  
TITLE  
SOURCE SOURCE  
1
TITLE  
2
DSK SUPER BG FRGD  
FILL  
2
MEMORY FRAME  
FREEZ  
MIX  
EFFECT  
N/R  
REV  
DIRECT DIRECT  
RECALL PATTERN  
DSK PVW  
AUXILIARY  
BLACK  
LAST  
X
FADE  
TO  
BLACK  
INS  
7
8
9
6
3
MEMORY  
8
INT  
VIDEO  
TITLE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BACKGROUND  
DEL  
4
1
0
5
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
8
CUT  
3
4
2
3
4
5
6
7
P
IN  
P
DSK  
2
RST  
FOREGROUND  
DOWN  
UP  
ENTR  
AUTO  
TRANS  
INT  
VIDEO  
BLACK  
1
MEMORY  
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
Returning to the previous image with the LAST X function  
To return to the state before recalling a snapshot, use the following  
procedure.  
PATTERN/KEY PAD  
1
2
Press the RECALL button in the snapshot section, turning it on.  
Alternatively, press the DIRECT RECALL button, turning it on.  
1
2
To leave the primary cross-point bus section settings unaltered, press  
the HOLD INPUT button, turning it on.  
Hold down the ENTER button in the pattern/numeric keypad, and  
press the LAST X button.  
Press the RECALL button.  
The button lights, and the pattern/numeric keypad is ready to accept a  
snapshot number.  
Snapshot Demonstration  
You can automatically show all of snapshots 0 to 99 in sequence.  
You can use this function for checking the snapshots, and also in the same  
manner as the factory setting demonstration (see page 3-8).  
The snapshot registers and factory setting demonstration registers are  
separate. Even after changing the settings in the snapshot registers, you can  
still run the factory setting demonstration unchanged.  
3
4
With the buttons 0 to 9, enter the snapshot number you want to recall.  
You can use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the number  
displayed.  
Press the ENTER button.  
This recalls the specified snapshot, and the control panel settings all  
change correspondingly.  
If, however, you turned the HOLD INPUT button on in step 1, the  
settings of the primary cross-point bus section do not change.  
To start the demonstration  
Hold down buttons 1 and 9 in the pattern/numeric keypad, and press the  
AUTO TRANS button in the effect transition section.  
This plays back the snapshots in sequence, starting from the snapshot  
whose number is specified at the time. During the demonstration, the  
buttons on the pattern/numeric keypad light in turn in the clockwise  
direction.  
Direct Snapshot Recall  
You can recall snapshots 0 to 9 with a single button operation.  
• The HOLD INPUT button setting also applies to the demonstration.  
• During the demonstration, the control panel does not accept any  
operations other than pressing the AUTO TRANS button.  
To end the demonstration  
Press the AUTO TRANS button once more.  
4-22  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
4-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Snapshots  
Chapter  
5
Reinitializing the Snapshots  
By reinitializing the snapshot registers, you can return them all to their  
factory defaults.  
Use the following procedure.  
Control From Editing  
Control Units  
1
Press the SET UP button.  
The setup menu appears.  
2
3
4
Press the PAGE button to display page 6/8.  
Press the F2(SNAP) button, to set it to “ON”.  
Press the F5(EXEC) button.  
Control From the PVE-500  
A confirmation message appears.  
5
To go ahead and reinitialize all snapshots, press F3(OK); to cancel  
press F5(CANCEL).  
You can combine the DFS-700/700P with the PVE-500 Editing Control  
Unit to carry out A/B roll editing using two players and one recorder.  
The PVE-500 controls the DFS-700/700P using PVE-500 control signals  
and GPI signals.  
When you press F3, all of the snapshots are returned to their factory  
defaults.  
Note  
For details of preread editing, see the section “Preread Editing” (page 5-  
14).  
Control using PVE-500 control signals  
You can control the following DFS-700/700P functions using 9-pin serial  
control signals from the PVE-500. Input these signals to the EDITOR  
connector on the rear panel of the DFS-700/700P.  
• Selecting the background image (FROM source) and foreground image  
(TO source)  
• Setting the transition duration  
• Executing auto transitions  
• Automatic snapshot (when you save editing data on the PVE-500, DFS-  
700/700P snapshots are saved and recalled automatically.)  
For more information about controlling these functions, refer to the PVE-500  
Operating Instructions.  
Downstream key control using GPI signals  
You can use GPI pulse signals from the PVE-500 to turn the DFS-700/  
700P downstream key function on or off on the falling edge of a pulse.  
Input the GPI signals to the T2 connector on the DFS-700/700P.  
For details of GPI signal timing, see page 5-13.  
4-24  
Chapter 4 Advanced Operations  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control From the PVE-500  
Preparations  
A/B Roll Editing  
Signal flow  
Make the following preparations to control the DFS-700/700P from the  
PVE-500.  
The flow of signals in A/B roll editing is shown below.  
On the DFS-700/700P  
• In page 1 of the setup menu, set F3(PORTS) to “PVE-500”.  
• To accept 9-pin serial control signals, press the EDITOR button on the  
control panel, turning it on. To accept GPI signals, press the GPI button,  
turning it on.  
(When the DFS-700/700P is powered on, it accepts either 9-pin serial  
control signals or GPI signals.)  
For more information about connections, see “Connections for an A/B Roll  
Editing System” (page 6-5).  
Recorder VCR  
Player VCR A  
FROM source signal  
(background video)  
On the recorder VCR  
• Set the recorder VCR so that it enters PB (playback) mode when stopped.  
(If the VCR has a selector for PB or PB/EE, set it to PB.)  
• If the VCR has a built-in TBC, set the VCR to DELAYED SYNC mode.  
VIDEO INPUT  
PGM OUT  
VIDEO INPUT  
On the PVE-500  
Using the setup menu, make the following settings.  
TO source (foreground  
video) signal  
Control signals  
DFS-700/700P  
Control signals  
Control signals  
Player VCR B  
For more information about using the setup menu, refer to the PVE-500  
Operating Instructions.  
• Set the switcher type (menu item SEtUP-20) to 500. (The factory default  
setting is 500.)  
Control signals  
• If you want to use the automatic snapshot function, set snapshot control  
(menu item SEtUP-21) to On. (The factory default setting is OFF.)  
PVE-500  
Note  
To improve editing accuracy, supply a reference sync signal to the PVE-500 and VCRs  
from the BLACK BURST OUT connectors on the DFS-700/700P.  
Cut Editing  
Signal flow in A/B roll editing  
To perform a cut edit by controlling the DFS-700/700P from the PVE-500,  
use the following procedure.  
For this operation, refer also to the PVE-500 Operating Instructions.  
1
2
3
Press the A/B button on the PVE-500 turning it off.  
Select the player VCR as the FROM source.  
Set the IN and OUT points for the FROM source and recorder, in any  
order.  
4
Conduct a preview as required, and execute the edit.  
5-2  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control From the PVE-500  
Procedure  
Control From the BVE-600  
You can combine the DFS-700/700P with a BVE-600 Editing Control Unit  
to carry out A/B roll editing using two players and one recorder.  
The BVE-600 controls the DFS-700/700P using the GPI trigger signals T1  
and T2.  
To perform A/B roll editing by controlling the DFS-700/700P from the  
PVE-500, use the following procedure.  
Read this in conjunction with the PVE-500 Operating Instructions.  
Notes  
• You cannot use the built-in switcher of the BVE-600 (BKE-611/612/621/  
622) when you are using the DFS-700/700P.  
• For details of preread editing, see the section “Preread Editing” (page 5-  
14).  
1
2
On the PVE-500, press the A/B button, turning it on.  
On the PVE-500, select the FROM source and TO source.  
The FROM source corresponds to the background on the DFS-700/  
700P, and the TO source corresponds to the foreground.  
3
Set the IN and OUT points for the FROM source, the TO source, and  
the recorder, in any order.  
Preparations  
Make the following preparations to control the DFS-700/700P from the  
BVE-600.  
For details of operation, refer to the BVE-600 Operating Instructions.  
Note  
Because the DFS-700/700P has a built-in frame synchronizer, output  
of player VCR edit points set on the PVE-500 is delayed by 1 frame,  
so that recording begins with the previous frame. However, recorder  
edit points are not delayed.  
On the DFS-700/700P  
• In page 1 of the setup menu, set F3(PORTS) to “BVE-600”.  
• Press the EDITOR button on the control panel, turning it on.  
(This button is lit when the DFS-700/700P is powered on.)  
4
5
On the PVE-500, press the TRANS button, turning it on, and set the  
transition duration.  
On the recorder VCR  
On the DFS-700/700P, select the effect and make other settings as  
required.  
Note that the transition duration set on the PVE-500 takes priority.  
• Set the recorder VCR so that it enters PB (playback) mode when stopped.  
(If the VCR has a selector for PB or PB/EE, set it to PB.)  
• If the VCR has a built-in TBC, set the VCR to DELAYED SYNC mode.  
6
Conduct a preview as required and execute the edit.  
The edit is recorded as shown below.  
On the BVE-600  
On the rear panel, set S502 DIP switch 3 and S503 DIP switch 2 to the  
lower position (OFF), and power the BVE-600 on again.  
When the unit is shipped from the factory, all DIP switches are set to the  
upper position (ON).  
FROM source OUT point  
TO source IN point  
Recorder and TO  
source OUT points  
Recorder and FROM  
source IN points  
Notes  
• To display the background image during or after a transition, press an  
appropriate BACKGROUND bus button on the DFS-700/700P.  
• Because the DFS-700/700P has a built-in frame synchronizer, output of  
player VCR edit points set on the BVE-600 is delayed by 1 frame, so that  
recording begins with the previous frame. However, recorder edit points  
are not delayed. For example, if the IN point of the player VCR is set to  
00:00:10:15, actual recording begins from 00:00:10:14.  
Recorder video  
Player A video  
Player B video  
Recorder video  
Transition duration  
• The timing of the start of a transition is delayed by two frames from the  
BVE-600 setting.  
5-4  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control From the BVE-600  
Timing of the trigger (T1/T2) signals  
The timing of the trigger signals output by the BVE-600 is as follows.  
A/B Roll Editing  
Signal flow  
VCRs stop  
OUT point  
VCRs start IN point  
Effect start point  
Player VCR A  
Recorder VCR  
Player A  
Player B  
DFS-700/700P  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
Background bus  
video  
Recorder  
T1  
PGM OUT  
T2  
Foreground bus  
video  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
Player VCR B  
T2 signal  
T1 signal  
PGM OUT  
signal  
Background bus image  
Foreground bus image  
Postroll  
Effect  
execution  
(transition)  
Preroll  
Control signal  
Control signal  
A-roll period  
B-roll period  
Control signal  
BVE-600  
Timing of trigger signals in A/B roll editing  
Note  
To improve editing accuracy, supply a reference sync signal to the BVE-600 and VCRs  
from the BLACK BURST OUT connectors on the DFS-700/700P.  
Signal flow in A/B roll editing  
5-6  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control From the BVE-900/2000 Series  
You can combine the DFS-700/700P with a BVE-900/910 or BVE-2000  
Series Editing Control Unit to carry out A/B roll editing using two players  
and one recorder.  
Downstream key control using GPI signals  
You can use signals from the GPI output connector on the BVE-900/910/  
For details of preread editing, see the section “Preread Editing” (page 5-14).  
2000 to turn the DFS-700/700P downstream key function on and off. Input  
the GPI signals to the T2 connector on the rear panel of the DFS-700/  
700P. (The BVE-2000 can also use 9-pin serial control signals to turn the  
downstream key on and off and to set the transition duration.)  
Connectable editing control units  
To control the DFS-700/700P, the BVE-900/910/2000 and optional BKE-  
913 board (for BVE-900/910) must have the following ROM versions or  
higher.  
Preparations  
BVE-900  
Ver. 1.11 or later  
Ver. 2.01 or later  
Ver. 1.02 or later  
Ver. 1.06 or later  
Ver. 1.10 or later  
BVE-900 with BKE-900K  
BVE-910  
Make the following preparations to control the DFS-700/700P from the  
BVE-900/2000-series editor.  
BKE-913  
BVE-2000  
For details about operation, refer to the Operating Instructions or User’s Guide  
supplied with the editor.  
Control using editor control signals  
On the DFS-700/700P  
• In page 1 of the setup menu, set F3(PORTS) to “PVE-500”.  
• To accept 9-pin serial control signals, press the EDITOR button on the  
control panel, turning it on. To accept GPI signals, press the GPI button,  
turning it on.  
(When the DFS-700/700P is powered on, it accepts either 9-pin serial  
control signals or GPI signals.)  
• To improve editing accuracy, supply a reference sync signal to the VCRs  
and editing control unit from the BLACK BURST OUT connectors on  
the DFS-700/700P.  
You can control the following DFS-700/700P functions using 9-pin serial  
control signals from the BVE-900/910/2000. Input these signals to the  
EDITOR connector on the rear panel of the DFS-700/700P. The functions  
marked with an asterisk below can only be controlled from the BKE-900  
after installation of the optional BKE-900K board.)  
• Background image (FROM source) and foreground image (TO source)  
selection  
• Pattern number selection  
• Transition direction (normal or reverse) selection  
• Transition duration selection  
On the recorder VCR  
• Automatic transition execution  
• Downstream key on and off  
Set the recorder VCR so that it enters PB (playback) mode when stopped.  
(If the VCR has a selector for PB or PB/EE, set it to PB.)  
• Snapshot saving and recall*  
On the BKE-900/910  
Set the PVW (preview) mode to EE.  
• Saving and loading DFS-700/700P data (snapshots and user program  
effects)*  
• BVE-900 with no BKE-900K installed: In SYSTEM SETUP mode, set  
BYTE-1 of the MAIN BLOCK INTERFACE parameters to hexadecimal  
“01” (EE).  
• BVE-910, or BVE-900 with BKE-900K installed: In SYSTEM SETUP  
mode, set PVW MODE under SW’ER CONFIGURATION to EE.  
Notes  
• It is not possible to load and save user program effects or snapshots from  
the BVE-900/910.  
• KEY FADE IN and KEY FADE OUT cannot be used. Also, KEY WIPE  
OUT and KEY MIX OUT can only be used with versions 2.24 and later  
of the BVE-2000.  
On the BVE-2000  
• In SYSTEM SETUP mode, set PVW MODE under SW’ER  
CONFIGURATION to EE.  
When using KEY WIPE OUT, the effect must be executed in the reverse  
direction.  
• In SYSTEM SETUP mode, set SW’ER TYPE under SW’ER  
CONFIGURATION to DFS.  
However, for versions 2.24 and later of the BVE-2000, select DFS-700/  
700P.  
5-8  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control From the BVE-900/2000 Series  
Control Using GPI Signals  
You can combine the DFS-700/700P with any editing control unit capable  
of GPI signal output to carry out A/B roll editing using two players and  
one recorder.  
You can use one GPI signal to execute DFS-700/700P effects, and a  
second GPI signal to turn the downstream key function on and off.  
Notes on Operation  
Editing point delay  
Because the DFS-700/700P has a built-in frame synchronizer, output of  
player VCR edit points set on the BVE-900/910/2000 is delayed by 1  
frame, so that recording begins with the previous frame. However,  
recorder edit points are not delayed.  
Preparations  
Example: If the IN point of the player VCR is set to 00:00:10:15,  
recording begins from 00:00:10:14.  
Make the following preparations to control the DFS-700/700P using GPI  
signals output by the editing control unit.  
If you are using a BVE-2000 with a ROM version of 2.00 or higher, in  
SYSTEM SETUP mode under SYSTEM CONFIGURATION you can set  
the DIGITAL EFFECT DELAY item to 01 so that the BVE-2000  
compensates for the delay automatically.  
For details about operation, refer to the manuals supplied with your  
editing control unit.  
On the DFS-700/700P  
• In page 1 of the setup menu, set F3(PORTS) to “GPI”.  
• Press the EDITOR button on the control panel, turning it on.  
(This button is lit when the DFS-700/700P is powered on.)  
Executing effects in the reverse direction  
• To execute an effect in the reverse direction from the BVE-900/910, add  
3000 to the DFS-700/700P effect pattern number. However, add 500 to  
the pattern numbers of user program effects (pattern numbers 9000 and  
above).  
On the recorder VCR  
• Set the recorder VCR so that it enters PB (playback) mode when stopped.  
(If the VCR has a selector for PB or PB/EE, set it to PB.)  
• If the VCR has a built-in TBC, set the VCR to DELAYED SYNC mode.  
Examples:  
To execute effect 25 in the reverse direction, specify pattern number  
3025.  
To execute effect 9203 in the reverse direction, specify pattern number  
9703.  
On the editing control unit  
• Set the GPI signal output timing to 3 frames before the IN point.  
• Set the GPI signal pulse length to at least 1 frame.  
• To execute an effect in the reverse direction from the BVE-2000, add a  
minus sign (–) before the DFS-700/700P pattern number.  
Example:  
To execute effect 25 in the reverse direction, specify effect pattern  
number –25.  
Notes  
• To display the background image during or after a transition, press an  
appropriate BACKGROUND bus button on the DFS-700/700P.  
• Because the DFS-700/700P has a built-in frame synchronizer, output of  
player VCR edit points set on the editing control unit is delayed by 1  
frame, so that recording begins with the previous frame. However,  
recorder edit points are not delayed. For example, if the IN point of the  
player VCR is set to 00:00:10:15, recording begins from 00:00:10:14.  
Effect intervals  
Effects cannot be executed if there is no interval between transitions, as  
shown below in figure (a).  
Be sure to leave an interval of at least two frames or more between  
transitions, as shown in figure (b).  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
Transition  
Transition  
Transition  
At least two  
frames  
(b)  
Transition  
(a)  
Minimum interval between transitions  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-10  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control Using GPI Signals  
Timing of the GPI signal  
A/B Roll Editing  
Signal flow  
The timing of the GPI signal from the editing control unit is as follows.  
The flow of signals in A/B roll editing is as follows.  
OUT point  
VCRs start IN point  
VCRs stop  
Effect start point  
For more information about connections, “see Connections for an A/B Roll  
Editing System” (page 6-5).  
Player A  
Player B  
Player VCR A  
Recorder VCR  
Recorder  
GPI signal  
3 frames  
DFS-700/700P  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
Foreground bus  
video  
PGM OUT  
Background bus  
video  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
PGM OUT  
signal  
Foreground bus  
image  
Background bus image  
Player VCR B  
Execution of  
effect (transition)  
Postroll  
Preroll  
GPI signals  
A-roll period  
B-roll period  
Control signal  
Control signal  
Control signal  
Timing of GPI signal in A/B roll editing  
Editing control unit  
Turning a Downstream Key On and Off  
Note  
To improve editing accuracy, supply a reference sync signal to the editing control unit and  
the VCRs from the BLACK BURST OUT connectors on the DFS-700/700P.  
If in page 1 of the setup menu you have set F3(PORTS) to “PVE-500” or  
“GPI” then you can turn a downstream key on and off using a GPI signal  
input to the T2 connector on the DFS-700/700P.  
As shown below, the downstream key is turned alternately on and off at  
the falling edge of the GPI signal.  
Signal flow in A/B roll editing  
GPI signal  
3 frames  
DSK OFF  
3 frames  
DSK ON  
Turning a downstream key on and off — GPI signal timing  
5-12  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
5-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preread Editing  
Chapter  
6
Notes on preread editing  
• A BVE-2000 Ver. 2.24 or later is recommended as the editor.  
In this case, set PREVIEW MODE to FULL, and use a monitor  
connected to the DFS-700 PROGRAM OUT.  
If using a BVE-2000 earlier than Ver. 2.24 or another editor, previewing  
is not possible.  
• It is not possible to set the DFS-700 preread mode from the editor.  
It must be set manually.  
For an editor other than the BVE-2000, it is not possible to set the preread  
mode for the VTR. It must be set manually.  
System Connections  
and Settings  
• During preread editing, the effect patterns which can be used are  
restricted to those for which a title can be used automatically.  
• During normal editing the video output is delayed by one frame, but  
during preread editing, the video selected on the background bus only is  
delayed by 4H.  
This section describes how to connect the DFS-700/700P to other  
equipment. It also lists the setup operations required before you can use the  
DFS-700/700P.  
When carrying out R to P or P to R editing make sure that the background  
bus signal is available to the R.  
• To obtain the DFS-700/700P program output, use digital PGM OUT or  
analog component PGM OUT connectors on the DFS-700/700P  
processor unit.  
Note  
Before making connections, ensure that all of the devices are powered off.  
Settings for preread editing  
Preparations on the DFS-700/700P  
In page 1 of the setup menu, set F2(PRE_RD) to ON. When PRE_RD is  
set to ON, a "P" appears at the beginning of line 2 of the menu display,  
indicating preread mode. (Except during preread editing, if PRE_RD is set  
to ON the edit points will be shifted, so be sure to set it to OFF. It is not  
possible to make this setting from the editor.)  
Preparations on a BVE-2000 earlier than Ver. 2.24  
Set AUX F7(PREREAD) to ON.  
Preparations on a BVE-2000 Ver. 2.24 or later  
• In SYSTEM SETUP mode set the PREVIEW MODE of SW'ER  
CONFIGURATION to FULL.  
• Set AUX F7(PREREAD) to ON.  
• In SYSTEM SETUP mode set the DIGITAL EFFECT DELAY of  
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION to 01.  
5-14  
Chapter 5 Control From Editing Control Units  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
6-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Basic System Connections  
Key Signal Connections  
The following are the connections required for basic image creation with  
the DFS-700/700P.  
These connections are for the signals for title keys and downstream keys  
(DSK) for inserting text and graphics.  
KEY OUT  
External title key source signal  
Character generator  
Synchronizing  
signal input  
Synchronizing signal input  
Synchronizing signal input  
Title key fill signal  
(can also be used as  
key source.)  
VIDEO OUT  
DSK key fill signal (can  
also be used as key  
source.)  
Recorder VCR, program  
monitor, etc.  
DFS-700/700P processor  
VIDEO INPUT  
Player VCR, video camera,  
character generator, etc.  
BLACK BURST OUT  
DSK KEY IN  
PANEL  
VIDEO INPUT  
DFS-700/700P processor  
To AC supply  
PGM OUT  
External DSK key source  
signal  
VIDEO IN  
(GEN LOCK IN)  
VIDEO OUT  
Character generator  
PANEL  
BLACK BURST OUT  
KEY OUT  
To AC supply  
AC power cord  
(supplied)  
25-pin control cable  
(supplied)  
25-pin connector (rear panel)  
Video/key signals  
Control signals  
DFS-700/700P control panel  
Black burst signal  
(reference synchronizing signal)  
Video signals  
DFS-700/700P control panel  
Note  
Control signals  
For the cables used for connection to a character generator, check in the instructions supplied  
with the character generator.  
Black burst signal  
(reference synchronizing signal)  
Key signal connections  
Basic system connections  
6-2  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
6-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Connections for Preread Editing  
Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System  
By combining a BVE-2000 editing control unit and a VCR capable of  
preread editing (such as the DSR-2000), you can build a preread editing  
system.  
By combining a BVE-2000 or PVE-500 editing control unit with the DFS-  
700 and two players and one recorder VCR, you can build an A/B roll  
editing system. Using an editor with GPI signal support, A/B roll editing  
controlled by GPI signals is also possible.  
Note  
The video from the player VCR is delayed by one frame in the DFS-700/  
700P, and therefore playback advanced by one frame is required.  
When using GPI signals  
Control the M/E through the GPI/T1 connector, and the downstream keyer  
through the GPI/T2 connector. You can control M/E and downstream keys  
simultaneously.  
Player VCR  
Recorder VCR  
Monitor  
SRP-L300 Delay  
Unit  
2
AUDIO LINE OUT  
AUDIO LINE IN  
REF  
VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
IN  
VIDEO  
OUT  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
Player VCR A  
Recorder VCR  
DFS-700/700P control panel  
REF  
VIDEO  
IN  
Monitor  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO VIDEO  
IN OUT  
3
1
1
1
3
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
DFS-700/700P control panel  
DFS-700/700P  
processor  
PGM OUT  
PGM OUT  
VIDEO INPUT 1~8  
VIDEO INPUT 1~8  
BLACK  
BURST  
OUT  
EDITOR  
SWER  
DFS-700/700P processor  
PGM OUT  
VIDEO INPUT  
VIDEO INPUT  
PLAYER  
RECORDER  
GPI/T 1  
GPI  
GPI/T 2  
Video and audio signals  
Control signals  
BVE-2000 editing control  
unit  
VTR  
VTR  
VTR  
Editor  
Cables used  
1 These depend on the type of VCR being connected. Check with the instructions  
supplied with the VCR.  
2 XLR (3-pin) cables  
3 RCC/5G/10G/30G 9-pin remote control cables or RCC-5F 33-pin remote control  
VIDEO OUT  
REMOTE  
REF  
VIDEO  
IN  
REF  
cables  
Video signals  
Control signals  
Black burst signal  
Player VCR B  
Preread editing system connections  
(reference synchronizing signal)  
A/B roll editing system connections (1) — using GPI signals  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
6-4  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
6-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections for an A/B Roll Editing System  
When using the BVE-2000  
Setup Menu Settings  
Setup Menu Organization  
Control the M/E and downstream keyer through the 9-pin connector. You  
can control M/E and downstream keys simultaneously.  
The setup menu is divided into eight pages, and each appears as shown in  
the following example.  
Example display:  
Menu name  
SYS  
SCREEN  
4:3  
PRE RD  
OFF  
PORTS  
PVE500  
TALLY  
OFF  
CpnIN  
Settings  
IN  
4
To submenu  
A “P” appears here when P 1/8  
preread editing is on.  
VIDEO  
OUT  
REF  
VIDEO  
IN  
Values  
Page  
Player VCR A  
Recorder VCR  
DFS-700/700P control panel  
REF  
VIDEO  
IN  
System Setup (page 1/8)  
AUDIO  
LINE  
OUT  
Button  
Setting  
Meaning  
Values  
VIDEO OUT  
VIDEO  
IN  
REMOTE  
AUDIO  
IN  
REMOTE  
(First value is factory default.)  
SCREEN  
PRE RD  
F1  
F2  
Set screen aspect ratio.  
4:3/16:9  
OFF/ON  
1
BLACK  
BURST  
OUT  
1
Toggle preread editing on/off.  
DFS-700/700P  
processor  
When this is on, a “P” appears at the  
beginning of line two of the menu  
display.  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
PGM OUT  
3
3
PVE-500/BVE-600/GPI  
(Select “PVE500” when a BVE-2000 is  
connected.)  
F3  
PORTS  
TALLY  
Select type of editor connected to  
EDITOR connector.  
(See table below.)  
VIDEO  
INPUT  
1
EDITOR  
F4  
F5  
Toggle rear panel tally output signal on/ OFF/ON  
off.  
VIDEO OUT  
REMOTE  
VIDEO SW’ ER  
CpnIN  
Assignment of  
IN1-4 r: assign 1 1-4/5-8  
REF  
VIDEO  
IN  
3
3
(Only appears when  
optional BKDF-702/702P  
is installed.)  
numbers to rear panel to 4.  
COMPONENT  
To confirm displayed assignment, press  
F3(OK); to cancel press F5(CANCEL).  
VTR  
IN5-8 r: assign 5  
to 8.  
VTR  
BVE-2000 Editing Control Unit  
connectors 5 to 8  
/1 /4  
VTR  
AUDIO  
LINE  
OUT  
F3(PORTS) setting and control  
Player VCR B  
Values Valid control for each connector  
REF IN  
4
EDITOR connector  
PVE-500 DVS control  
GPI/T 1  
GPI/T 2  
EDITOR  
–
DSK transitions  
2
2
LINE IN  
LINE IN  
SRP-L300 Delay Unit  
BVE-600  
GPI  
–
–
Auto transitions  
Auto transitions  
LINE OUT  
DSK transitions  
Video and audio signals  
Control signals  
SRP-V200R Audio Mixer  
Black burst signal (reference  
synchronizing signal)  
Cables used  
1 These depend on the type of VCR being connected. Check with the instructions  
supplied with the VCR.  
2 XLR (3-way) cables  
3 RCC/5G/10G/30G 9-pin remote control cables  
4 RCC11A audio mixer control cable  
A/B roll editing system connections (2) — using the BVE-2000  
6-6  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
6-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu Settings  
Primary inputs and signal formats  
System Information Display (page 2/8)  
SDI: serial digital signals  
Component: analog component signals  
Composite: analog composite signals  
YC: analog YC signals  
RGB: analog RGB signals (G signal with sync)  
Button  
Setting  
Meaning  
Values  
F1  
INFO  
Display options installed.  
CONFIG r  
BKDF-701/711/712  
(Appears as “***” when not installed.)  
To return, press F5(EXIT r).  
Input number  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
5
F2  
INFO  
Display software version.  
VER r  
DFS-700/700P :x.xx  
BKDF-712: x.xx  
DATA: x.xx  
Panel: x.xx  
(Appears as “----” when not installed.)  
With standard  
equipment  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
Component Component Component Component  
RGB  
With BKDF-701 SDI  
installed  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
Component Component Component Component Component Component Component Component  
To return, press F5(EXIT r).  
RGB  
F3  
F5  
PW ON  
INSTL  
Select setup mode at power on.  
FACTRY (factory default)/USER (user  
settings)  
With BKDF-702/ SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
Composite Composite Composite Composite  
702P installed  
Component Component Component Component YC  
RGB  
YC  
YC  
YC  
(mode 1)a)  
r
Press F3(OK) to confirm install; press  
F5(CANCEL) to cancel.  
Install new software.  
With BKDF-702/ SDI  
702P installed  
SDI  
SDI  
SDI  
Component  
Composite  
YC  
Component Component  
Composite RGB  
YC  
Component  
Composite  
YC  
b)  
(mode 2)  
Composite  
YC  
Input Video Setup (page 3/8)  
a) Setup menu item CpnIN set to “IN 1-4”  
b) Setup menu item CpnIN set to “IN 5-8”  
Button  
F1  
Setting  
In No.  
TYPE  
Meaning  
Values (First value is factory default.)  
Select input to set.  
Select input signal format.  
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/DSK  
F2  
SDI/YUV/Cps/YC/RGB/***  
Output Video Setup (page 4/8)  
(Only types which can be set appear. See the table  
on the next page. When F1(In No.) is set to DSK,  
appears as “***”.)  
Button  
Setting  
Meaning  
Values (First value is factory default.)  
F3  
TBC  
TBC Center setting for the input  
signal  
0H/0.5H/1H/***  
This setting is not possible when TYPE is Cps or  
YC.  
F1  
CLEAN  
Select output video from  
CLEAN OUT connector.  
CLEAN/KEYOUT/PVW  
(See page 2-15.)  
The output signal is output in the  
correct phase if the phase  
relationship of the center value with  
respect to the reference  
synchronizing signal is in the range  
±0.3H.  
F2  
F3  
CLIP  
Toggle white clip and dark clip on/  
off.  
Only valid for SDI output signals,  
and the SDI standard white and  
dark values are applied.  
OFF/ON  
T-Area  
Toggle safe title indication on  
preview video using CLEAN OUT  
connector on/off.  
When on, the safe title indication  
shows approximately 85% of the  
whole image area.  
OFF/ON  
+H–pos  
+XPT  
F4  
F5  
Video phase adjustment of input  
signal  
• When SDI, YUV, Cps, YC, or RGB is selected, this  
can be adjusted from –24 to +24 in steps of 2.  
• When DSK is selected, this can be adjusted from  
–30 to +31 in steps of 1.  
1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8/***  
Cross-point button assignment to  
input signals  
(When F1(In No.) is set to DSK, appears as “***”.)  
To assign a signal, hold down the function key, and  
press a cross-point button on the background bus.  
This item appears when F1(CLEAN)  
is set to “PVW”.  
FLD FZ  
F4  
Select the field output when the  
internal frame memory is set to field  
freeze mode.  
ODD/EVEN  
6-8  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
6-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Menu Settings  
Control Panel Setup (page 5/8)  
Button  
Setting  
Meaning  
Values (First value is factory default.)  
F1  
BEEPER  
Toggle beeper on/off.  
ON/OFF  
ON: Beeper sounds if the fan stops, there is a  
power supply error, an operation error or a key pad  
operation.  
OFF: Beeper only sounds if the fan stops or there is  
a power supply error.  
Appendixes  
F2  
F3  
BRIGHT  
SAVER  
Brightness of control panel  
fluorescent indicators  
LOW/HIGH  
OFF/ON  
Toggle screen saver on/off. When  
on, the screen saver operates when  
there is no button operation for ten  
minutes.  
FTB  
ENABLE/DISABL  
F4  
Enable/disable FADE TO BLACK  
function.  
Warning Messages  
Setting DISABL makes the function  
not available.  
Warning messages appear in the menu display panel of the control panel  
when trouble occurs during operation of the DFS-700/700P.  
Press the F5 (OK) button to erase the message.  
Initializing User Settings (page 6/8)  
Button  
F1  
Setting  
SETUP  
SNAP  
Meaning  
Values (First value is factory default.)  
Initialize setup data.  
OFF/ON  
To initialize an item, set it to “ON”. It is not possible  
to initialize more than one item at a time.  
F2  
Initialize snapshot.  
Warning message format  
Initialize user program effects.  
F3  
USRPGM  
KEYPAD  
EXEC  
Initialize keypad data.  
F4  
F5  
Warning messages are displayed in the following format.  
Execute initialization selected from  
F1 to F4.  
To initialize, press F3(OK); to cancel press  
F5(CANCEL).  
Number  
Problem  
What to do  
r
r
r
Loading User Settings From Memory (page 7/8)  
011  
FAN STOP!!->  
Turn OFF Power  
Button  
F1  
Setting  
Meaning  
Values (First value is factory default.)  
SETUP  
SNAP  
Load setup data.  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Load snapshot.  
F2  
F3  
USRPGM  
Load user program effects.  
F4  
F5  
KEYPAD  
EXEC  
Load keypad data.  
OFF/ON  
Execute load selected from F1 to  
F4.  
To load, press F3(OK); to cancel press  
F5(CANCEL).  
Saving User Settings in Memory (page 8/8)  
Button  
Setting  
Meaning  
Values (First value is factory default.)  
F1  
F2  
F3  
SETUP  
SNAP  
Save setup data.  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
Save snapshot.  
USRPGM  
Save user program effects.  
F4  
F5  
KEYPAD  
EXEC  
Save keypad data.  
OFF/ON  
Execute save selected from F1 to  
F4.  
To save, press F3(OK); to cancel press  
F5(CANCEL).  
6-10  
Chapter 6 System Connections and Settings  
Appendixes  
A-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Warning Messages  
Warning message list  
Effect Type List  
The effects provided by the DFS-700/700P are classified as follows.  
Pattern No.  
Types of effects  
The number of available patterns  
Reference  
page no.  
Varieties in  
standard  
configuration  
Varieties with  
BKDF-712  
installed  
Varieties with  
BKDF-711  
and 712  
Varieties with  
BKDF-711  
installed  
The following warning messages are displayed.  
Display  
Meaning  
What to do  
installed  
011 FAN STOP!!  
->Turn OFF Power  
The processor detected that the power Turn off the power and check the power  
supply fan is stopped.  
supply fan. If this does not solve the  
problem, contact a Sony service  
representative.  
1-676  
Wipe  
79  
37  
10  
8
79  
37  
10  
8
79  
37  
10  
8
79  
37  
10  
8
A-29, A-30  
A-30, A-31  
A-31  
700-809  
1000-1018  
1020-1027  
1030-1058  
1059  
Matrix wipe  
Mosaic  
012 Power Unit Error  
->Turn OFF Power  
There is trouble with the power supply.  
Turn off the power and check the power  
supply. If this does not solve the  
problem, contact a Sony service  
representative.  
Still mirror  
Y&C modify  
Cut  
A-32  
10  
1
10  
1
10  
1
10  
1
A-32  
A-32  
Video sync signals are not being sent  
correctly from the main unit to the  
control panel.  
Check the cable connection.  
021 Reference Signal Error  
->  
1065-1067  
1075-1079  
1080  
Strobe, Cinema  
Cropping  
Mix  
3
3
3
3
A-33  
5
5
5
5
A-33  
022 Self Diagnostic Error xxxx/xxxx  
-> Check on Maintenance menu  
An error was detected during self  
diagnostics when the system was  
powered on. (xxxx/xxxx indicates the  
error status.)  
Contact your vendor or a Sony service  
representative.  
1
1
1
1
—
1100-1128  
Picture-in-picture  
19  
2
19  
2
19  
2
19  
2
A-33  
1130, 1131 Zoom up  
1150, 1151 Spotlight  
A-33  
023 Software Version Mismatch  
-> Load the latest S/W  
The processor and control panel  
software versions are different.  
Contact your vendor or a Sony service  
representative.  
2
2
2
2
A-34  
1200-1207  
1210-1213  
1230-1233  
Dynamic mirror  
8
8
8
8
A-34  
031 Data Backup Error  
->  
User program, setup or other data could Contact your vendor or a Sony service  
not be written to backup memory. representative.  
Stream  
4
4
4
4
A-34  
Accordion  
4
4
4
4
A-34  
1240, 1241 Multi-screen  
2
2
2
2
A-35  
1250-1271  
1280-1283  
1285-1288  
1300-1307  
1330-1394  
1500-1524  
1530-1535  
1600-1613  
1620-1690  
Wave modulation  
13  
4
13  
4
13  
4
13  
4
A-35  
Real paint  
Stained glass  
Slide  
A-35  
4
4
4
4
A-35  
8
8
8
8
A-35  
Split slide  
Compress  
Expand  
32  
20  
6
32  
20  
6
32  
20  
6
32  
20  
6
A-36, A-37  
A-38  
A-38  
2D rotation  
12  
7
12  
7
12  
7
12  
7
A-39  
2D rotation + Compress +  
Slide  
A-39  
1700-1707  
1730-1742  
1750-1753  
1760-1824  
3D rotation  
Door  
8
8
8
8
A-40  
A-40  
A-40  
A-41  
6
6
6
6
Split 3D rotation  
4
4
4
4
3D rotation + Compress +  
Slide  
24  
24  
24  
24  
1850-1855  
1900-1964  
2000-2006  
2100-2144  
2150-2154  
2160-2167  
2200-2251  
2260-2269  
2270-2279  
2280-2284  
Album turn  
Flip, Tumble  
Twist  
6
6
6
6
A-42  
33  
4
33  
4
33  
4
33  
4
A-42, A-43  
A-43  
Page turn  
40  
5
40  
5
40  
5
40  
5
A-44  
Page turn (modified)  
Split page turn  
Sphere  
A-45  
8
8
8
8
A-45  
11  
10  
11  
10  
10  
5
11  
10  
10  
5
11  
10  
10  
5
A-45  
Ripple  
A-46  
Burst, Explosion, Ring, Swirl 10  
Amoeba, Melt, Lens  
A-46  
5
A-47  
(continued)  
A-2  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Type List  
Effect Control Parameter List  
You can change effect pattern parameters by using the  
pattern adjustment knobs, joystick, and Z-knob on the  
control panel.  
F1 to F5: Menu page 1  
Pattern No.  
Types of effects  
Reference  
page no.  
The number of available patterns  
F6 to F10: Menu page 2  
F11 to F15: Menu page 3  
X/Y: Joystick  
Varieties in  
standard  
configuration  
Varieties with  
BKDF-712  
installed  
Varieties with  
BKDF-711  
and 712  
Varieties with  
BKDF-711  
installed  
installed  
Z: Z-knob  
2300-2307  
2320-2329  
Two-picture slide  
0
0
8
0
0
8
A-47  
A-47  
Two-picture slide,  
2D rotation  
10  
10  
Effect control parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
2340-2357  
Two-picture rotation +  
Compress + Slide  
0
18  
0
18  
A-48  
Wipe  
0017  
0018  
2360-2375  
2380-2395  
2400-2419  
2420-2437  
2470-2473  
2480-2499  
2500-2519  
2520-2534  
2550-2554  
2560-2564  
2600-2625  
2630-2633  
2640-2651  
Two-picture intersect  
Two-picture box  
Two-picture brick  
Two-picture brick (flip type)  
Split 3D rotation  
Masked flip  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
12  
16  
18  
18  
4
0
12  
16  
18  
18  
4
A-49  
A-50  
A-51  
A-52  
A-52  
A-53  
A-54  
A-55  
A-55  
A-56  
A-56  
A-57  
A-57  
A-57  
A-58  
A-58  
A-58  
A-59  
A-59  
A-60  
F2: Rotation angle (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F3: Rotation speed (Rot = 0 to 100)  
F4: Auto center (CENTER = AUTO/FIX)  
0
0
0
0021 Wipe  
to  
0
F1: Pattern aspect ratio (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
0029  
20  
20  
13  
5
0
20  
20  
13  
5
F2: Rotation angle (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F3: Rotation speed (Rot = 0 to 100)  
F4: Auto center (CENTER = AUTO/FIX)  
0034  
to  
0039  
2ch picture-in-picture  
2ch picture-in-picture  
Two-picture page turn  
Split page turn  
0
0
0
1010  
1011  
User mosaic  
5
0
5
F1: Size of a mosaic cell (Size = 0 to 100)  
F2: Aspect ratio of a mosaic cell (Aspect = Wider to taller)  
F3: Softness (Soft = 0 to 100)  
3D split  
0
10  
4
10  
4
3D split flip  
0
Multi-cube  
0
9
9
F5 : Type of cell (TYPE = FLAT, GLASS 1 to GLASS 4)  
Pattern mosaic  
2660, 2661 Three-picture multi-cube  
0
0
2
1015  
to  
1018  
2690-2692  
2700-2715  
2720-2724  
2730-2739  
2740-2752  
2800-2805  
Special wipe  
3D page turn  
3D twist  
0
3
3
F1: Size of a mosaic cell (Size = 0 to 100)  
F2: Aspect ratio of a mosaic cell (Aspect = Wider to taller)  
F3: Softness (Soft = 0 to 100)  
0
12  
5
12  
5
0
3D box twist  
3D modeling effect  
0
10  
4
10  
4
F4: Aspect ratio of the mask area (MskAsp = Wider to taller)  
F5: Type of cell (TYPE = FLAT, GLASS 1 to GLASS 4)  
Y&C modify  
0
3D beveled edge,  
Picture-in-picture  
0
6
6
1040  
1043  
1046  
F1: Degree of luminance masking (PstSol = OFF, LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 7)  
2810-2813  
3D modeled edge,  
Picture-in-picture  
0
0
4
4
A-60  
1050  
Y&C modify  
2820-2827  
2830-2833  
2840-2845  
2850-2857  
3D cube, 3D brick  
3D cube  
0
0
8
8
A-60  
A-60  
A-61  
A-61  
A-61  
A-61  
A-62  
4-4  
F1: Degree of luminance masking (Poster = OFF, LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 7)  
0
0
0
4
F2: Positive/negative selection (VIDEO = NORMAL/NEGA/MONO/  
MN+NEG)  
3D cylinder, Sphere, Heart  
3D wave, 3D flag  
0
0
6
6
0
0
8
8
F3: Softness (Soft = 0 to 100)  
2860, 2861 Kaleidoscope  
0
0
2
2
1055  
to  
1058  
Y&C modify  
2865, 2866 3D crystal, Mirror cube  
0
0
2
2
F1: Degree of luminance masking (Poster = OFF, LEVEL 1 to LEVEL 7  
2870-2881  
9000-9009  
3D object effect  
0
0
9
9
F2: Positive/negative selection (VIDEO = NORMAL/NEGA/MONO/  
MN+NEG)  
Linear user program  
(transition)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
F3: Softness (Soft = 0 to 100)  
9100-9109  
9200-9209  
9300-9309  
Linear user program  
(animation)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
4-4  
4-4  
4-4  
F4: Aspect ratio of the mask area (MskAsp = Wider to taller)  
(continued)  
Nonlinear user program  
(transition)  
Nonlinear user program  
(animation)  
A-4  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
1065  
Strobe  
1280  
to  
1283  
1285  
1286  
Real paint, Stained glass  
F1: Frames displayed per second (Strobe = 0 to 100)  
Cinema  
F1: Degree of paint effect (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F2: Frames per second (Strobe = 0 to 100)  
F3: Softness (Soft = 0 to 100)  
1066  
1067  
F1: Frames displayed per second (Strobe = 0 to 100)  
F2: Wide screen degree (Wide = 0 to 100)  
F3: Wide screen position (Posi = Bottom to top)  
F4: Softness (Soft = 0 to 100)  
F4: Mask pattern (MASK = OFF/CIRCLE/RECT/CIRINV/RECINV)  
F5: Aspect ratio of the mask area (MskAsp = Taller to wider)  
Split slide  
1380  
to  
1383  
1385  
to  
1075 Cropping  
to  
1079  
F1: Slide frequency (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F2: Split frequency (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F3: Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F1: X-coordinate of center (Pos_X = Left to right)  
F2: Y-coordinate of center (Pos_Y = Bottom to top)  
F3: Size of pattern (Size = 0 to 100)  
1388  
F4: Aspect raito of the pattern (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
Picture-in-picture (three-dimensional)  
Split slide  
1390  
to  
1394  
F1 :Slide frequency (Freq = 0 to 100)  
1102  
1103  
1106  
to  
F1: X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –70° to +70°)  
F2: Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –70° to +70°)  
F3: Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –70° to +70°)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2D rotation + Compress + Slide (modified)  
1690  
1109  
F1: Amount of curving (Curve = 0 to 100)  
F2: Curve direction (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F3: Amount of spiral (Spiral = –100 to +100)  
F4: Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
Split 3D rotation  
1104  
1105  
Picture-in-picture (skew)  
F1: Expansion and reduction along X-axis (Size_X = Small to 3 times)  
F2: Expansion and reduction along Y-axis (Size_Y = Small to 3 times)  
1750  
to  
1753  
F1: Number of split (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F3: Degree of distortion along X-axis (Skew_X = Min: No distortion)  
(default)  
2150  
to  
2154  
Page turn  
F4: Degree of distortion along Y-axis (Skew_Y = Min: No distortion)  
(default)  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Change in turn direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
Split page turn  
1120 Picture-in-picture  
to  
2160  
to  
2167  
F2: Display position (POS = TOP_L/TOP/TOP_R/LEFT/CENTER/RIGHT/  
1128  
BTM_L/BOTTOM/BTM_R)  
F1: Number of split (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F3: Picture size (Size = 0 to 100)  
2250  
2251  
Picture-in-picture (sphere)  
F4: X-axis picture position (Pos_X = –100 to +100)  
F5: Y-axis picture position (Pos_Y = –100 to +100)  
F1: Degree of modification (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F2: Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F3: X-axis mapping area (Area_X = 0 to 100)  
F4: Y-axis mapping area (Area_Y = 0 to 100)  
1150  
1151  
Spotlight  
F1: Spotlight brightness at maximum fader lever position (Shadow = Dark  
to bright)  
(continued)  
F4: Aspect ratio of the processing area (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
1210 Stream  
to  
F1: Stream direction (Dirctn)  
1213  
Wave modulation  
1250  
to  
1253  
1270  
1271  
F1: Degree of modification 1 (Amp_X = 0 to 100) (1250: Modification  
along X-axis)  
F2: Degree of modification 2 (1250: Amp_Y = 0 to 100) (1251/1271:  
Angle = 0 to 99)  
1250: Modification along Y-axis  
1251, 1271: Direction of modification  
1252, 1253, 1270: Not used  
F3: Wave cycle (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F4: Wave speed (Speed = 0 to 100)  
(continued)  
A-6  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
2260  
to  
2269  
Ripple  
2284  
Lens  
F1: Amplitude of modulation (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F2: Frequency of modulation (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F1: Amplitude of modulation (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F2: Size of lens (Size = 0 to 100)  
F3: Speed of modulation (Speed = –100 to +100) (2260 to 2265 only)  
or area of modulation (Area = –100 to +100) (2266, 2267)  
F3: Form of lens (FORM = FLAT/INNER/OUTER/SPHERE)  
F4: Modulation aspect ratio (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
F5: Direction of modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
Two-picture brick  
F4: Aspect ratio of modulation (Aspect = 0 to 100)  
F5: Direction of modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
2400  
to  
2407  
F6: Swirl modulation selection (SPMOD = OFF, IN, OUT) (2260 to 2265  
only)  
F1: Depth (Depth = 0 to 100)  
F3: Stretching of picture in depth section (Strch = 0 to 100)  
F4: Position of picture in depth section (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F7: Degree of swirl modulation (Spiral = 0 to 100) (2260 to 2265 only)  
Burst  
2410  
to  
2419  
2270  
2271  
F1: Degree of splitting (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F2: Rotation around Z axis (Rot = –100 to +100)  
2420  
to  
2437  
Two-picture brick (flip type)  
F3: Degree of modulation (Spiral = –100 to +100) (2270) or area of  
modulation (Area = 0 to 100) (2271)  
F1: Depth (Depth = 0 to 100)  
F2: Form model (FORM = SLAB/DUAL)  
F3: Stretching of picture in depth section (Strch = 0 to 100)  
F4: Position of picture in depth section (Posi = –100 to +100)  
Split 3D rotation  
F4: Form of modulation (FORM = RANDAM/CONST/WAVE1/WAVE2/  
LINE1/LINE2/PIXEL1/P1XEL2)  
2272  
2273  
Broken glass  
2470  
to  
2473  
F1: Degree of splitting (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F2: Rotation around Z axis (Rot = –100 to +100)  
F3: Splitting adjustment (Split = 0 to 100)  
Explosion  
F1: Fineness of splitting (Freq = 0 to 100)  
Masked flip  
2480  
to  
2489  
F1: Mask shape (PATTERN = CIRCLE/HEART/RECT/DIA/HEXA/  
5STAR/6STAR/WAVE)  
F1: Stream area (AREA = NARROW/MEDIUM/WIDE/SPWIDE)  
F2: Fineness of splitting (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F3: Bias of splitting (Bias = 0 to 100)  
Masked flip  
F2: Form of modulation (FORM = RANDAM/PIXEL/LINE/WAVE1/  
WAVE2/WAVE3/WAVE4/CONST)  
F3: Degree of swirl modulation (Spiral = –100 to +100)  
F4: Modulation aspect ratio (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
F5: Direction of modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
Ring  
2490  
to  
2499  
F1: Mask shape (PATTERN = CHECK1/ CHECK2/ CHECK3/CHECK4/  
CHECK5/LINE/RECT1/RECT2)  
F2: Mask slant (SLANT = ON/OFF)  
2ch picture-in-picture  
2274  
2501  
to  
2507  
F1: Amplitude of modulation (Amp = –100 to +100)  
F2: Degree of splitting (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F4: Modulation aspect ratio (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
F5: Direction of modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
Swirl  
F1: Timing at which picture appears (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Picture position (POSITN = HORZ1/HORZ2/HORZ3/VERT1/VERT2/  
VERT3/DIAG1/DIAG2)  
F3: Picture size (Size = 0 to 100)  
2275  
to  
2277  
F4: Relative position on X axis (Gap_X = 0 to 100)  
F5: Relative position on Y axis (Gap_Y = 0 to 100)  
2ch picture-in-picture  
F1: Amplitude of modulation (Amp = –100 to +100)  
F4: Modulation aspect ratio (Aspect = Taller to wider)  
F5: Direction of modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
Swirl (soft rotation)  
2508  
2509  
F2: Picture positon (POSITN = HORZ1/HORZ2/HORZ3/VERT1/VERT2/  
VERT3/DIAG1/DIAG2)  
2278  
2279  
2280  
F1: Degree of modulation (Soft = 0 to 100)  
Amoeba  
F3: Picture size (Size = 0 to 100)  
F4: Relative positon on X axis (Gap_X = 0 to 100)  
F5: Relative positon on Y axis (Gap_Y = 0 to 100)  
(continued)  
F2: Fineness of modulation (Freq = 0 to 100)  
Meltdown  
2283  
F1: Form of modulation (FORM = WAVE1/RAND1/WAVE2/RAND2)  
F2: Direction of modulation (TRANS = NORM1/NORM2/REV1/REV2)  
(continued)  
A-8  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
2ch picture-in-picture (with perspective, horizontal alignment)  
F1: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2521  
2ch picture-in-picture (slide)  
2510  
to  
2513  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Y-axis size (Size_Y = 0 to 100)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (1CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM/BTM-R/BTM-L/TOP-L/TOP-R)  
F3: Y-axis position (Pos_Y = 0 to 100)  
F3: Direction of picture movement (CH2) (2CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM/BTM-R/BTM-L/TOP-L/TOP-R)  
2ch picture-in-picture  
F4: X-axis size (Size_X = 0 to 100)  
F5: Relative position on X axis (Gap_X = 0 to 100)  
2ch picture-in-picture (with perspective, vertical alignment)  
F1: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2522  
2514  
to  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (1CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM/BTM-R/BTM-L/TOP-L/TOP-R)  
2517  
F2: X-axis size (Size_ X = 0 to 100)  
F3: X-axis position (Pos_ X = 0 to 100)  
F4: Y-axis size (Size_Y = 0 to 100)  
F3: Direction of picture movement (CH2) (2CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM/BTM-R/BTM-L/TOP-L/TOP-R)  
2523  
2524  
2ch picture-in-picture (compressed, expanded)  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F5: Relative position on Y axis (Gap_Y = 0 to 100)  
2518  
2ch picture-in-picture (manual)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (1CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM/HORZ/VERT)  
F1: X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F3: Direction of picture movement (CH2) (2CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM/HORZ/VERT)  
2ch picture-in-picture  
2525  
F5: Form of picture (PTN = RECT/CIRCLE/HEART/DIA/PENTA/HEXA/  
5STAR/6STAR)  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (1CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM)  
F6: Direction of X-axis rotation (SYM RX X = ON/OFF)  
F7: Direction of Y-axis rotation (SYM RY Y = ON/OFF)  
F8: Direction of Z-axis rotation (SYM RZ Z = ON/OFF)  
F11: Relative position on X axis (Loc_X2 = –100 to +100)  
F12: Relative position on Y axis (Loc _Y2 = –100 to +100)  
F13: Relative position on z axis (Loc _Z2 = –100 to +100)  
F14: Two-picture combination type (COMBIN = ZLOC/CH1/CH2/MIX)  
F3: Direction of picture movement (CH2) (2CHDIR = LEFT/RIGHT/TOP/  
BOTTOM)  
F4: Direction of effect (CH1) (1chAng = –100 to +100)  
F5: Direction of effect (CH2) (2chAng = –100 to +100)  
2526  
2527  
2ch picture-in-picture  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (1CHROT = TOP-L1/ TOP-L2/  
TOP-R1 /TOP-R2/BTM-R1/ BTM-R2/BTM-L1/ BTM-L2)  
2519 2ch picture-in-picture (manual)  
F1: X-axis rotation (CH1) (Rot_X1 = –100 to +100)  
F2: Y-axis rotation (CH1) (Rot_Y1 = –100 to +100)  
F3: Z-axis rotation (CH1) (Rot_Z1 = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F3: Direction of picture movement (CH2) (2CHROT = TOP-L1/ TOP-L2/  
TOP-R1 /TOP-R2/BTM-R1/ BTM-R2/BTM-L1/ BTM-L2)  
2ch picture-in-picture  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F5: Form of picture (PTN = RECT/CIRCLE/HEART/DIA)  
F6: X-axis rotation (CH2) (Rot_X2 = –100 to +100)  
F7: Y-axis rotation (CH2) (Rot_Y2 = –100 to +100)  
F8: Z-axis rotation (CH2) (Rot_Z2 = –100 to +100)  
F11: X-axis position (CH2) (Loc_X2 = –100 to +100)  
F12: Y-axis position (CH2) (Loc_Y2 = –100 to +100)  
F13: Z-axis position (CH2) (Loc_Z2 = –100 to +100)  
F14: Two-picture combination type (COMBIN = ZLOC/CH1/CH2/MIX)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (1CHROT = TOP1/ TOP2/  
BTM1/ BTM2/LEFT1/LEFT2/RIGHT1/RIGHT2)  
F3: Direction of picture movement (CH2) (2CHROT = TOP1/ TOP2/  
BTM1/ BTM2/LEFT1/LEFT2/RIGHT1/RIGHT2)  
2530  
2531  
2ch picture-in-picture  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Direction of picture movement (CH1) (ROTDIR = PLUS/MINUS)  
F3: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2532  
2ch picture-in-picture  
2520  
2ch picture-in-picture  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Speed of rotation (Rot = –100 to +100)  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
(continued)  
(continued)  
A-10  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
2533  
2534  
2ch picture-in-picture  
2700  
2701  
3D page turn  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F1: Delay between channels (Delay = 0 to 100)  
F2: Speed of rotation (Rot = –100 to +100)  
F3: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F2: Change in turn direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
F3: Radius of turn (Radius = 0 to 100)  
F4: Adjustment of effect end position (EndAdj= –100 to +100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2550  
to  
2554  
Two-picture (front, reverse) page turn  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Change in turn direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
Split page turn  
2560  
to  
2564  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Change in turn direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
F3: Type of turn (DIVTYP = VERT1/VERT2/HORZ1/HORZ2)  
F10: Delay before start of turn (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D page turn  
2702  
2703  
2624  
2625  
3D split  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F1: Speed at which cracks spread (Speed = 0 to100)  
F2: Degree to which fragments fly away (Fly = 0 to 100)  
X/Y: Move the break center point  
F2: Change in turn direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
F3: Radius of turn (Radius = 0 to 100)  
F4: Adjustment of effect end position (EndAdj= –100 to +100)  
F5: Type of division (TYPE = HORZ1/HORZ2/VERT1/VERT2)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2630  
2631  
3D split flip  
F1: Direction of flip (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Area of the part that flips (Area = 0 to 100)  
F3: Amount of randomness in flip (Rand = 0 to 100)  
F4: X direction divisions (Div_X = 1 to 16)  
F5: Y direction divisions (Div_Y = 1 to 16)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F10: Delay before start of turn (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D page turn  
2704  
2705  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Spread in turn direction (Spread = –100 to +100)  
F3: Radius of turn (Radius = 0 to 100)  
F10: Delay before start of flip (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D split flip  
F4: Adjustment of effect end position (EndAdj= –100 to +100)  
F5: Type of division (TYPE = HORZ/VERT)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2632  
2633  
F1: Direction of split (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Change in direction of split (Curve = –100 to +100)  
F3: Area of the part that splits (Area = 0 to 100)  
F4: Split frequency (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F10: Delay before start of turn (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
(continued)  
F10: Delay before start of split (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
Special wipe  
2690  
F1: Width of crystal (Width = 0 to 100)  
F2: Angle of wipe (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F3: Refractive index of crystal (Refrct = 0 to 100)  
Special wipe  
2691  
2692  
F1: Angle of wipe (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Degree of edge curve (Angle = 0 to 99)  
X/Y: Move the center point  
(continued)  
A-12  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
2710  
2711  
3D page turn  
2730  
to  
3D box twist  
F1: Direction of turn (Angle = 0 to 100)  
F3: Area of the part that twists (Area = 0 to 100)  
F4: Type of twist (TYPE = TYPE01/TYPE02/TYPE03/TYPE04)  
F5: Delay before start of twist (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D modeling effect  
F2: Change in turn direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
F3: Radius of turn (Radius = 0 to 100)  
2739  
F4: Adjustment of effect end position (EndAdj= –100 to +100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
2750  
F1: Amplitude of swirl (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F2: X-axis rotation of path into swirl (Path_X = –100 to +100)  
F3: Y-axis rotation of path into swirl (Path_Y = –100 to +100)  
F4: Z-axis rotation of path into swirl (Path_Z = –100 to +100)  
3D beveled edge, Picture-in-picture  
F10: Delay before start of turn (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D page turn  
2800  
to  
2712  
2713  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F3: Radius of turn (Radius = 0 to 100)  
2805  
F4: Adjustment of effect end position (EndAdj= –100 to +100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Bevel frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE10)  
F6: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D modeled edge, Picture-in-picture  
F10: Delay before start of turn (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D page turn  
2810  
to  
2714  
2715  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F3: Radius of turn (Radius = 0 to 100)  
2813  
F4: Adjustment of effect end position (EndAdj= –100 to +100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Border frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04)  
F6: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F7: Length of protruding part of frame (Length = 0 to 100)  
F8: Sharpness of frame edges (Sharp = 0 to 100)(2810 and 2811 only)  
F9: Position in the depth direction of the picture (Depth = 0 to 100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
F10: Delay before start of turn (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D twist  
2720  
F1: Direction of twist (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F2: Change in twist direction (Curve = –100 to +100)  
F3: Area of the part that twists (Area = 0 to 100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
(continued)  
F10: Delay before start of twist (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D twist  
2721  
to  
2724  
F3: Area of the part that twists (Area = 0 to 100)  
F4: Type of twist (TYPE = TYPE01/TYPE02/TYPE03/TYPE04)  
F6: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F10: Delay before start of twist (Delay = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
A-14  
Appendixes  
(continued)  
Appendixes  
A-15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
2826  
2827  
3D one-picture brick  
2820  
2821  
3D two-picture cube  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04)  
F6: Height of brick (Hight = 0 to 100)  
F5: Frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04/OFF)  
F6: Cube degree (Cube = 0 to 100)  
F7: Stretching of brick side in Y-axis direction (Strtch = 0 to 100)  
F8: Position of brick side in Y-axis direction (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F9: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F7: Stretching of picture in X-axis direction (Strtch = 0 to 100)  
F8: Position in X-axis direction (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F9: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D three-picture cube  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D one-picture cube  
2830  
2831  
2822  
2823  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04/OFF)  
F6: Cube degree (Cube = 0 to 100)  
F5: Frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04/OFF)  
F6: Cube degree (Cube = 0 to 100)  
F7: Stretching of picture in X-axis direction (Strtch = 0 to 100)  
F8: Position in X-axis direction (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F9: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F7: Stretching of picture in X-axis direction (Strtch = 0 to 100)  
F8: Position in X-axis direction (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F9: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D two-picture cube  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D two-picture brick  
2832  
2833  
2824  
2825  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04/OFF)  
F6: Cube degree (Cube = 0 to 100)  
F5: Frame type (TYPE = TYPE01 to TYPE04/OFF)  
F6: Height of brick (Hight = 0 to 100)  
F7: Stretching of picture in X-axis direction (Strtch = 0 to 100)  
F8: Position in X-axis direction (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F9: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F7: Stretching of brick side in Y-axis direction (Strtch = 0 to +100)  
F8: Position of brick side in Y-axis direction (Posi = –100 to +100)  
F9: Width of frame (Width = 0 to 100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
(continued)  
(continued)  
A-16  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
Pattern  
No.  
Pattern  
No.  
2840  
2841  
3D cylinder  
2854  
2855  
3D wave  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Fine adjustment of mapping in X-axis direction (Area_X = 0 to 100)  
F5: Fine adjustment of mapping in Y-axis direction (Area_Y = 0 to 100)  
F6: Thickness of cylinder (Radius = 0 to 100)  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Direction of wave modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F6: Amplitude of wave modulation 1 (Amp1 = 0 to 100)  
F7: Frequency of wave modulation 1 (Freq1 = 0 to 100)  
F8: Phase of wave modulation 1 (Phase1 = 0 to 99)  
F7: Degree of wave modulation on cylinder sides (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F8: Frequency of wave modulation on cylinder sides (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F9: Phase of wave modulation on cylinder sides (Phase = 0 to 99)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F12: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F13: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
Sphere, Heart  
F9:Speed of auto change in phase of wave modulation 1 (Speed1 =  
–100 to +100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F11: Amplitude of wave modulation 2 (Amp2 = 0 to 100)  
F12: Frequency of wave modulation 2 (Freq2 = 0 to 100)  
F13: Phase of wave modulation 2 (Phase2 = 0 to 99)  
F14: Speed of auto change in phase of wave modulation 2 (Speed2 =  
–100 to +100)  
2842  
to  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Fine adjustment of mapping in X-axis direction (Area_X = 0 to 100)  
F5: Fine adjustment of mapping in Y-axis direction (Area_Y = 0 to 100)  
F6: Amount of X-axis auto rotation (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of Y-axis auto rotation (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of Z-axis auto rotation (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D wave  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D flag  
2845  
2856  
2857  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F5: Position of pole (POLE = RIGHT/LEFT)  
F6: Amplitude of wave modulation (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F7: Change in direction of waving (Swing = 0 to 100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
Kaleidoscope  
2850  
to  
2860  
2865  
F1: Amount of X-axis rotation (Rot_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of Y-axis rotation (Rot_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of Z-axis rotation (Rot_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Perspective (Pers = 0 to 100)  
F1: Size of repetition (Size = 0 to 100)  
2853  
F2: Amount of auto rotation (RotSpd = –100 to +100)  
3D crystal  
F1: Amount of auto repetition in X-axis rotation (Swng_X = 0 to 100)  
F2: Amount of auto repetition in Y-axis rotation (Swng_Y = 0 to 100)  
F3: Amount of auto rotation on Z-axis (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
F4: Width of beveled edge (Width = 0 to 100)  
F5: Height of beveled edge (Hight = 0 to 100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
Mirror cube  
F5: Direction of wave modulation (Angle = 0 to 99)  
F6: Amplitude of wave modulation (Amp = 0 to 100)  
F7: Frequency of wave modulation (Freq = 0 to 100)  
F8: Phase of wave modulation (Phase = 0 to 99)  
F9: Speed of auto change in phase of wave modulation (Speed = –100 to  
+100)  
2866  
2870  
F10: Position of light source (Light = –100 to +100)  
F1: Amount of auto rotation on X-axis (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F2: Amount of auto rotation on Y-axis (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F3: Amount of auto rotation on Z-axis (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
3D object effects  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
(continued)  
F1: Mapping mode (MapMod = POINT/FACE1/FACE2)  
(continued)  
A-18  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Control Parameter List  
Effect Motion Types  
Effect control parameters (continued)  
Effect type and adjustable parameters  
The effects of the DFS-700/700P can be classified by their direction type,  
as follows.  
Pattern  
No.  
2871  
to  
Effects classified by direction type  
3D object effects  
Pattern No.  
Direction type  
Characteristics  
F1: Mapping mode (MapMod = POINT/FACE1/FACE2)  
F2: Size of model (Size = 0 to 100)  
Transition type When you move the fader from one end to the  
other and back, the effect is executed in the  
same direction.  
1 to 1000  
1003 to 1010  
1059  
2876  
F3: Acceleration of fall (Accel = 0 to 100)  
Crosspoints selected with the BACKGROUND  
and FOREGROUND bus buttons change when  
the effect is executed.  
1080  
F4: Snaking on X-axis (Wave_X = 0 to 100)  
1200 to 1233  
1260 to 1271  
1300 to 2213  
2260, 2261  
2263, 2264  
2266 to 2283  
2300 to 2499  
2550 to 2752  
9000 to 9009  
9200 to 9209  
F5: Snaking on Y-axis (Wave_Y = 0 to 100)  
F6: Amount of auto rotation on X-axis (Spd_X = –100 to +100)  
F7: Amount of auto rotation on Y-axis (Spd_Y = –100 to +100)  
F8: Amount of auto rotation on Z-axis (Spd_Z = –100 to +100)  
F9: Frequency of snaking on X-axis (Freq_X = 0 to 100)  
X/Y/Z: Location, enlargement, and reduction of the pattern  
Animation type • When you move the fader from one end to the  
other and back, the effect is executed in the  
opposite direction.  
1001  
1011 to 1058  
1065 to 1079  
1100 to 1151  
1130 to 1171  
1240 to 1253  
1280 to 1288  
2250 to 2251  
2262  
Crosspoints selected with the BACKGROUND  
and FOREGROUND bus buttons do not  
change.  
• If the editing control unit select switch is set to  
PVE-500, the N/R button lights during  
execution of the effect.  
2265  
2284  
2500 to 2534  
2800 to 2881  
9100 to 9109  
9300 to 9309  
A-20  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations  
Some effect patterns have attributes that allow you to  
change them, for example by changing the position or  
LOCATE: Location of the pattern  
XY: X-axis and Y-axis location  
Z: Z-axis location  
LIGHTING: Lighting  
SP: Spotlighting  
LN: Direct lighting  
PL: Even lighting  
TRAIL: Trail  
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
Pattern No. TITLE  
BD SF BV  
L
R
T
B
XY  
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
adding a border.  
The following list shows the attributes that are  
available for each pattern.  
TITLE: Title key transition  
EDGE: Edge effects  
BD: Border  
SF: Blurring  
BV: Bevel edge  
CROP: Cropping  
L: Left  
1202  
1203  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1204  
√
√
√
1205  
√
√
1206  
√
√
√
1207  
√
√
TR: Trail  
DB: Drop border  
DS: Drop shadow  
1210 and 1211  
1212 and 1213  
1230  
√
√
√
OPTION: Options  
√
√
√
√
√
√
R: Right  
T: Top  
B: Bottom  
711: The ✩ mark indicates that the BKDF-711  
is required for this function.  
712: The ★ mark indicates that the BKDF-712  
is required for this function.  
1231  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1232  
√
1233  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1240 and 1241  
1250  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
1251  
√
Pattern No. TITLE  
BD SF BV  
L
R
T
B
XY  
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
1252 to 1253  
1260 to 1269  
1270 and 1271  
1280 to 1283  
1285 to 1288  
1300  
0001 to 0016  
0017 to 0018  
0019 to 0020  
0021 to 0029  
0030 to 0033  
0034 to 0039  
0104 to 0676  
0700 to 0809  
1000  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1301  
√
1302  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1303  
√
√
√
√
√
1304  
√
√
1001  
√
1305  
√
√
1003 to 1010  
1011  
1306  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1307  
√
√
1015 to 1018  
1020 to 1027  
1030 to 1050  
1055 to 1058  
1059  
√
√
√
√
1330 to 1332  
1340  
√
√
1341  
√
√
1343  
√
√
√
√
1344  
√
√
1065  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1347  
1066 to 1067  
1075 to 1079  
1080  
√
√
1349  
√
√
√
√
√
1350 and 1351  
1360  
√
√
√
√
√
√
1100 to 1101  
1102 to 1105  
1106 to 1109  
1120 to 1128  
1130 to 1131  
1150 to 1151  
1200  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1361  
√
√
√
√
√
√
1362  
1363  
√
√
1370 and 1371  
1372 and 1373  
1380 to 1388  
1390  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1201  
√
1391  
A-22  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations  
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
XY  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
Pattern No. TITLE  
Pattern No. TITLE  
BD SF BV  
L
R
T
B
XY  
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
BD SF BV  
L
R
√
√
T
B
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
1392  
1393  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1732  
1740  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1394  
√
√
1741  
1500  
√
√
√
√
√
√
1742  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1501  
1750 to 1753  
1760 to 1770  
1780 to 1783  
1800 to 1806  
1807 to 1811  
1812 to 1816  
1820  
1502  
√
√
√
1503  
√
√
√
1504  
√
√
√
√
√
1505  
1506  
√
√
1507  
√
√
1508  
√
√
1821  
√
1510  
1822  
√
√
1511  
√
√
√
1823  
√
√
1512  
√
√
1824  
√
√
1513  
√
√
1850  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1514  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1851  
√
√
√
√
√
√
1515  
1852  
√
√
√
1520 to 1522  
1523  
1853  
1854  
1524  
√
√
√
1855  
1530 to 1535  
1600  
1900  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1901  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1601  
√
√
√
1902 to 1945  
1946  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1602  
1603  
√
√
√
1947  
1604  
√
1948  
√
√
√
√
1605  
√
√
√
1949 and 1950  
1951  
1606  
√
√
1607  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1952  
√
√
√
1610  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1954  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1611 and 1612  
1613  
1955  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1956  
1620 to 1644  
1690  
√
√
√
1958 and 1959  
1960 to 1964  
2000 to 2003  
2100  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1700  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
1701  
√
√
√
1702  
√
√
√
2101  
√
√
1703  
√
2102  
√
1704  
2103  
1705  
√
2104  
√
√
√
√
1706  
√
√
2105  
√
√
1707  
√
√
2106  
√
√
1730  
2107  
1731  
2108  
√
√
A-24  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations  
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
Pattern No. TITLE  
Pattern No. TITLE  
BD SF BV  
L
R
T
B
XY  
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
BD SF BV  
L
R
T
B
XY  
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
2109  
2110  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2325  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
√
√
√
√
√
2326  
√
2111  
√
√
2327  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2112  
2328 and 2329  
2340 to 2344  
2345 and 2346  
2347 and 2348  
2349 and 2350  
2351  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2113  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2114  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2115 to 2120  
2121 to 2125  
2126  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2127 to 2144  
2150 to 2154  
2160  
√
√
√
√
√
√
2352 and 2353  
2354 and 2355  
2356 and 2357  
2360 to 2375  
2380 to 2395  
2400 to 2419  
2420 to 2427  
2428 and 2429  
2430 to 2437  
2470 to 2473  
2480 to 2483  
2484 to 2499  
√
√
√
√
√
2161 and 2162  
2163  
√
√
√
√
2164  
√
2165  
√
2166  
√
2167  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2200 to 2213  
2250 and 2251  
2260  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2261  
2500  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2262 and 2263  
2264  
√
√
√
2501 to 2517  
2518 to 2519  
2520  
√
√
√
√
√
√
2265 and 2266  
2267  
2521 to 2523  
2524 and 2525  
2526 and 2527  
2530 and 2531  
2532  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2268  
2269  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2270 to 2273  
2274  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2275 to 2278  
2279  
√
√
√
√
√
√
2533 and 2534  
2550 to 2554  
2560 to 2564  
2600 to 2620  
2624  
√
√
√
2280 and 2281  
2282  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
2283  
√
√
√
2284  
√
√
√
2625  
2300  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
✩
2630 to 2633  
2640 to 2651  
2660 and 2661  
2690  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2301  
√
√
2302  
✩
2303  
√
√
√
√
2304 to 2307  
2320  
√
√
√
√
2691 and 2692  
2700 to 2715  
2720 to 2724  
2730 to 2739  
2740 to 2752  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
2321  
√
√
√
√
√
2322 and 2323  
2324  
√
√
√
√
A-26  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Variant Forms and Decorations  
Effect Pattern Image List  
EDGE  
CROP  
LOCATE  
LIGHTING  
TRAIL  
OPTION  
This section illustrates the effect patterns of the DFS-700/700P.  
Pattern No. TITLE  
BD SF BV  
L
R
√
√
√
√
√
√
T
B
√
√
√
√
√
√
XY  
√
√
√
√
√
√
Z
SP LN PL TR DB DS 711 712  
How to read the patterns  
2800 to 2805  
2810 to 2813  
2820 to 2827  
2830 to 2833  
2840 to 2845  
2850 to 2857  
2860 and 2861  
2865  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
Direction of the effect a)  
Left and right mirror pictures  
Upper and lower mirror pictures  
✩
FG  
FG  
F
FG  
G
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
BG  
FG  
2866  
2870 to 2876  
2880 and 2881  
Abbreviations in the illustrated patterns  
FG: Foreground picture  
BG: Backgrond picture  
T: Transition type  
9000 to 9009  
9100 to 9109  
9200 to 9209  
9300 to 9309  
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
a) Direction of the effect when executed in normal direction  
A: Animation type  
Wipe  
1
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
6
11  
16  
21  
30  
104  
10  
T
12  
17  
22  
31  
105  
13  
18  
23  
32  
106  
14  
19  
24  
33  
107  
15  
T
20  
T
26  
T
T
T
A-28  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Wipe (continued)  
Matrix wipe (continued)  
772  
773  
310  
321  
500  
510  
604  
614  
624  
662  
311  
323  
502  
516  
606  
616  
626  
664  
312  
324  
504  
518  
608  
618  
628  
674  
313  
320  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
774  
RANDOM  
RANDOM  
787  
788  
793  
798  
809  
789  
794  
799  
790  
795  
791  
796  
800  
506  
600  
610  
620  
630  
676  
508  
602  
612  
622  
660  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
792  
797  
808  
T
T
T
T
T
RANDOM  
Mosaic  
FG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
1000  
1001  
1006  
1011  
1017  
MOSAIC(8X8)  
MOSAIC(8X8)  
MOSAIC(8X8)  
T
T
T
A
T
T
T
A
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
1003  
1010  
1015  
FG  
FG  
FG  
HORIZONTAL  
MOSAIC  
HORIZONTAL  
MOSAIC  
VERTICAL  
MOSAIC  
VERTICAL  
MOSAIC  
Matrix wipe  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
700  
702  
740  
760  
770  
707  
742  
761  
710  
750  
762  
771  
712  
752  
763  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
BG  
BG  
VARIABLE  
MOSAIC  
1016  
1018  
717  
754  
764  
A
A
RANDOM  
RANDOM  
RANDOM  
RANDOM  
RANDOM  
(continued)  
A-30  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Freeze, Strobe, Cinema  
Sill mirror  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
F G FG  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
F G  
1065  
1066  
1067  
1020  
1022  
1024  
1026  
1021  
1023  
1025  
1027  
BG  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
COLOR STROBE  
BG  
B&W STROBE  
BG  
STROBE  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
FG  
FG  
Cropping  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
1075  
CROPPING  
(fade)  
F G  
FG  
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
A
F G FG  
Picture-in-picture  
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
F G FG  
F G FG  
3D P in P  
(fade)  
P in P  
3D P in P  
SKEW P in P  
P in P  
1103  
1100  
1101  
1106  
1102  
1107  
1104  
1109  
(auto centering)  
(fade)  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
3D CIRCLE  
P in P  
3D CIRCLE  
P in P  
3D HEART  
P in P  
3D HEART  
P in P  
Y & C modify  
SKEW P in P  
1108  
1105  
(fade)  
(fade)  
FG  
FG  
BG  
(DISSOLVE)  
BG  
BG  
BG  
(DISSOLVE)  
1030  
1033  
1043  
1050  
1057  
NEGATIVE  
COLOR  
B & W  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
Zoom up  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
ZOOM UP  
(auto centering)  
1040  
1046  
1055  
BG  
BG  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
(DISSOLVE)  
1130  
1131  
Y&C MASK  
Y MASK  
ZOOM UP  
A
A
FG  
FG  
(DISSOLVE)  
C MASK  
MODIFY  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
MODIFY  
BG  
1056  
1058  
BG  
MODIFY  
MODIFY  
MODIFY  
A
A
Cut  
(CUT)  
1059  
FG  
BG  
T
A-32  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Spotlight  
Multi-screen  
FG FG FG  
FG FG FG  
FG FG FG  
FG FG  
FG FG  
FG  
FG  
+
BG  
(DISSOLVE)  
BG  
(DISSOLVE)  
1150  
FG  
+
FG  
1151  
1201  
FG  
FG  
1240  
1241  
BG  
BG  
A
A
A
A
Wave modulation  
Dynamic mirror  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
F G BG  
FG  
F G  
FG  
F G  
1250  
1251  
1252  
1263  
1271  
1253  
1264  
1260  
BG  
F G FG  
F G FG  
F G FG  
1200  
A
A
T
T
A
T
A
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
WAVE  
+
FADE  
WAVE  
+
FADE  
WAVE  
+
FADE  
RANDOM  
+
FADE  
FG  
FG  
FG  
1261  
1262  
1270  
1265  
FG  
FG  
1202  
1204  
1206  
1203  
1205  
1207  
FG  
BG  
T
T
T
FG  
F G  
F G  
FG  
F G  
F G FG  
F G FG  
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
BG  
BG  
F G  
RANDOM  
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
FG  
+
1269  
FADE  
F G FG  
FG  
F G FG  
T
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
F G FG  
F G FG  
F G FG  
F G FG  
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
Real paint  
FG  
FG  
FG  
F G  
F G  
F G  
F G FG  
BG  
BG  
PAINT  
+
STROBE  
PAINT  
+
STROBE  
PAINT  
+
STROBE  
PAINT  
+
STROBE  
1283  
1280  
1281  
1286  
1282  
A
A
A
A
A
A
Stream  
stream  
FG  
Stained glass  
F G  
stream  
F G  
stream  
1213  
1233  
FG  
1210  
1211  
1212  
1232  
stream  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
STAINED GLASS  
STAINED GLASS  
+
+
1285  
STROBE  
STROBE  
Accordion  
Slide  
1230  
1231  
T
1300  
1301  
1302  
1303  
T
T
T
T
T
T
1304  
1305  
1306  
1307  
T
T
A-34  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Split slide (continued)  
Split slide  
1370  
1371  
1381  
1386  
1372  
1382  
1387  
1391  
1393  
1373  
1383  
1388  
1330  
1340  
1331  
1332  
1341  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1380  
1385  
1390  
1392  
1394  
T
T
T
1343  
1347  
1350  
1360  
1362  
1344  
1349  
1351  
1361  
1363  
T
T
T
T
T
T
(continued)  
A-36  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Compress  
2D rotation  
1500  
1501  
1503  
1505  
1507  
1510  
1515  
1524  
1600  
1601  
1606  
1613  
1602  
1607  
1603  
1610  
1604  
1611  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1502  
1504  
1506  
1508  
1605  
1612  
2D rotation + Compress + Slide  
1511  
1520  
1512  
1521  
1620  
1630  
1640  
1644  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1513  
1522  
1514  
1523  
1635  
T
T
1643  
T
Expand  
2D rotation + Compress + Slide (modified)  
2D  
1690  
(variable)  
1530  
1535  
1531  
1532  
1533  
1534  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
A-38  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
3D rotation  
3D rotation + Compress + Slide (modified)  
1700  
1704  
1701  
1705  
1702  
1706  
1703  
1707  
1762  
1760  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
1765  
1770  
1781  
1780  
1782  
Door  
T
T
T
T
1730  
1731  
1742  
1732  
1740  
T
T
T
T
T
T
1783  
1802  
1800  
1806  
1741  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
Split 3D rotation  
FG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
1750  
BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
1751  
FG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
1752  
1753  
1807  
1811  
1813  
1815  
1820  
1810  
1812  
1814  
1816  
T
T
T
T
1821  
1822  
1823  
1824  
T
T
T
T
A-40  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Album turn  
Flip, Tumble (continued)  
FG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
1943  
1945  
1947  
1850  
1851  
1853  
1855  
1942  
INT  
VIDEO  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
1852  
1854  
1944  
1946  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
FG BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
Flip, Tumble  
BG  
FG  
1949  
1951  
1954  
1948  
1950  
1952  
INT  
VIDEO  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
1900  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
1901  
1905  
1909  
1916  
1921  
1933  
1941  
BG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
1902  
1906  
BG  
BG  
FG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
BG  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
1955  
1958  
1960  
1964  
1956  
1959  
1962  
INT  
VIDEO  
BG  
BG  
BG  
FG  
FG  
BG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
1912  
1920  
1930  
1940  
BG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
INT VIDEO  
FG  
INT VIDEO  
BG  
FG  
BG  
FG  
T
Twist  
(continued)  
2000  
2002  
2001  
2003  
T
T
T
T
A-42  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Page turn (modified)  
Page turn  
PAGETURN  
(variable)  
PAGETURN  
(variable)  
PAGETURN  
PAGETURN  
(variable)  
PAGETURN  
(variable)  
2153  
2150  
2151  
2152  
2154  
2100  
2104  
2108  
2112  
2120  
2122  
2124  
2126  
2128  
2132  
2136  
2140  
2101  
2105  
2109  
2113  
2102  
2106  
2110  
2114  
2121  
2123  
2125  
2127  
2130  
2134  
2138  
2142  
2144  
2103  
2107  
2111  
2115  
(variable)  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
Split page turn  
FG  
FG  
FG  
2160  
2161  
T
T
T
T
T
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
2162  
2164  
2166  
2163  
T
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
2165  
T
FG  
FG  
FG  
2167  
T
FG  
FG  
Sphere  
FG  
FG  
2200  
2201  
T
T
T
T
FG  
FG  
2202  
2204  
2211  
2203  
T
FG  
FG  
2131  
2135  
2139  
T
T
T
2210  
FG  
T
2133  
2137  
2141  
FG  
FG  
FG  
T
T
T
2212  
2213  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
T
T
T
Picture-in-picture (sphere)  
FG  
FG  
FG  
FG  
P
in  
P
SPHERE  
fade  
P
in  
P
SPHERE  
2250  
2251  
(
)
A
A
2143  
FG  
A-44  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Ripple  
Amoeba, Melt, Lens  
BG  
2260  
2261  
2263  
2265  
2267  
2269  
BG  
BG  
2280  
2281  
2283  
T
A
T
T
T
T
T
A
T
T
T
T
A
T
T
2262  
2282  
2284  
BG  
BG  
2264  
Two-picture slide  
BG  
BG  
BG  
2266  
2300  
2301  
2303  
2305  
2307  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BG  
2268  
2302  
2304  
2306  
Burst, Explosion, Ring, Swirl  
BG  
2270  
2271  
2273  
2275  
2277  
2279  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BG  
2272  
Two-picture slide, 2D rotation  
2274  
2276  
2278  
2320  
2321  
2323  
2325  
2327  
2329  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2322  
2324  
2326  
2328  
T
A-46  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Two-picture rotation + Compress + Slide  
Two-picture intersect  
BG  
BG  
BG  
2340  
2341  
2343  
2345  
2347  
2349  
2351  
2360  
2361  
2363  
2365  
2371  
2373  
2375  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
BG  
2342  
2362  
2364  
2370  
2372  
2374  
2344  
2346  
2348  
2350  
BG  
2352  
2354  
2353  
2355  
2356  
2357  
A-48  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Two-picture box  
Two-picture brick  
2380  
2381  
2383  
2385  
2387  
2389  
2391  
2400  
2401  
2403  
2405  
2407  
2411  
2413  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2382  
2384  
2386  
2388  
2390  
2402  
2404  
2406  
2410  
2412  
2392  
2394  
2393  
2395  
2414  
2416  
2415  
2417  
2418  
2419  
A-50  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Masked flip  
Two-picture brick (flip type)  
2420  
2421  
2423  
2425  
2427  
2429  
2431  
2480  
2481  
2483  
2485  
2487  
2489  
2491  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2422  
2424  
2426  
2428  
2430  
2482  
2484  
2486  
2488  
2490  
2432  
2434  
2433  
2435  
2492  
2494  
2493  
2495  
2436  
2437  
2496  
2498  
2497  
2499  
Split 3D rotation  
2470  
2471  
2473  
T
T
T
T
2472  
A-52  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
2ch picture-in-picture  
2ch picture-in-picture  
BG  
BG  
2500  
2501  
2503  
2505  
2507  
2509  
2511  
2520  
2521  
2523  
2525  
2527  
2531  
2533  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
BG  
BG  
2502  
2504  
2506  
2508  
2510  
2522  
BG  
BG  
2524  
2526  
2530  
2532  
2534  
2512  
2514  
2513  
2515  
Two-picture page turn  
2550  
2551  
2553  
T
T
T
T
T
2516  
2518  
2517  
2519  
2552  
2554  
A-54  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
3D split flip  
Split page turn  
2560  
2561  
2563  
2630  
2631  
2633  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2562  
2564  
2632  
Multi-cube  
2640  
2641  
2643  
2645  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
3D split  
2600  
2604  
2642  
2644  
2646  
2650  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2605  
2610  
2612  
2620  
2625  
2611  
2613  
2624  
2651  
2661  
Three-picture multi-cube  
2660  
T
T
A-56  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
Special wipe  
3D box twist  
2690  
2691  
2730  
2731  
2733  
2735  
2737  
2739  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2692  
2732  
2734  
2736  
2738  
3D page turn  
2700  
2701  
2703  
2705  
2711  
2713  
2715  
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
T
2702  
2704  
2710  
2712  
2714  
3D modeling effect  
2750  
2752  
2740  
T
T
2751  
T
3D twist  
2720  
2721  
2723  
T
T
T
T
2722  
2724  
A-58  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
3D cylinder, Sphere, Heart  
3D beveled edge, Picture-in-picture  
BG  
BG  
2800  
2801  
2803  
2805  
2840  
2841  
2843  
2845  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
BG  
BG  
2802  
2842  
BG  
BG  
2804  
2844  
3D modeled edge, Picture-in-picture  
3D wave, 3D flag  
BG  
2810  
2811  
2813  
2850  
2851  
2853  
2855  
2857  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
BG  
BG  
2812  
2852  
3D cube, 3D brick  
BG  
2854  
2820  
2821  
2823  
2825  
2827  
2831  
2833  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
2856  
BG  
2822  
2824  
2826  
2830  
2832  
Kaleidoscope  
2860  
2861  
2866  
A
A
A
A
3D crystal, Mirror cube  
2865  
A-60  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Effect Pattern Image List  
To Exchange the Button Labels  
After changing a pattern assignment, you can exchange the label on the  
3D object effect  
numeric buttons.  
Proceed as follows.  
2870  
2871  
2873  
2875  
2880  
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1
2
Write the new pattern on one of the supplied exchange labels.  
Insert the supplied tool into the hole at the side of the button and  
remove the button.  
2872  
2874  
3
Insert the tool into the slot on the side of button, lifting up the white  
button cap, and remove the cap.  
4
5
6
Remove the old label and insert the new label.  
Replace the white button cap.  
2876  
2881  
Return the button to its original position.  
2
3
A-62  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
Specifications  
S/N  
More than 50 dB (composite)  
More than 55 dB (component,  
S-Video)  
General  
Output signals  
Supplied accessories  
Signaling system DFS-700: NTSC  
DFS-700P: PAL  
Power requirements  
PGM OUT  
SDI  
AC power cord (1)  
25-pin control cable, 10 m (1)  
Button labels (1 set)  
Tool for removing key tops (1)  
Operation manual (1)  
System delay  
1 frame  
BNC type × 2  
Preread mode: Background bus  
only 4H  
270 Mb/s, compliant with SMPTE-  
259M  
DFS-700: 100 V AC, 50/60 Hz  
DFS-700P: 220/240 V AC,  
50/60 Hz  
COMPONENT BNC type (Y/R–Y/B–Y ) × 2  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, sync  
negagive  
R–Y/B–Y: 0.756 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
COMPOSITE BNC type × 2  
Video: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,  
sync negative  
Input signals  
Operating voltage DFS-700: 90 to 130 V AC, 47 to  
63 Hz  
Design and specifications subject to change without  
notice.  
VIDEO INPUT  
COMPONENT  
DFS-700P: 180 to 260 V AC, 47 to  
63 Hz  
BNC type (Y/R–Y/B–Y ) × 4  
(with BKDF-701: × 8)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
R–Y/B–Y: 0.756 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
To use some of the above  
COMPONENT connectors.  
R/G/B: 0.756 Vp-p, 75 ohms,  
sync on green  
Power consumption  
200 W  
S-VIDEO  
DIN × 2  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, sync  
negative  
C (BURST): 0.286 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
BNC type × 1  
SDI: 270 Mb/s, compliant with  
SMPTE-259M  
Peak inrush current  
(1) Power ON, current probe method: 24 A (240 V)  
(2) Hot switching inrush current, measured in  
accordance with European  
standard EN55103-1:13 A  
(230 V)  
RGB  
CLEAN OUT  
COMPOSITE (with BKDF-702/702P)  
BNC type × 4  
Operating temperature  
BLACK BURST OUT  
BNC type × 3  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
VIDEO: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms,  
sync negative  
Dimensions  
Control panel: 440 × 121 × 287 mm  
(w/h/d) (173/8 × 47/8 × 113/8  
inches)  
Processor: 440 × 133 × 520 mm  
(w/h/d) (173/8 × 51/4 × 201/2  
inches)  
Control panel: Approx. 3 kg  
(6 lb 9 oz)  
Processor unit: Approx. 14 kg  
(30 lb 13 oz)  
SYNC: 0.286 Vp-p  
BURST: 0.286 Vp-p  
S-VIDEO (with BKDF-702/702P)  
DIN × 4  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, sync  
negative,  
C (BURST): 0.286 Vp-p, 75 ohms  
BNC type × 2, loop through  
SYNC: 0.286 Vp-p  
BURST: 0.286 Vp-p  
BNC type × 4 (with BKDF-701:  
× 8)  
270 Mb/s, compliant with SMPTE-  
259M  
Control signals  
EDITOR  
GPI T 1/2  
D-sub, 9-pin × 1 (RS-422A)  
BNC type × 2, TTL level, active  
low  
Mass  
REF. VIDEO  
SDI INPUT  
PANEL  
TALLYL  
D-sub, 25-pin × 1  
D-sub, 25-pin × 1, relay contact  
output × 8  
Signal processing  
TERMINAL  
USB × 1  
DSK KEY IN  
BNC type × 2, loop through  
1.0 Vp-p, 75 ohms, sync negative  
Sampling rate  
Y: 13.5 MHz, R–Y/B–Y:  
6.75 MHz, KEY: 13.5 MHz  
Recommended equipment and cables  
Quantizing  
Linearity (composite output)  
Differential gain  
Y/R–Y/B–Y: 8 bits, KEY: 8 bits  
Editing control unit  
PVE-500, BVE-900/910/2000,  
BVE-600  
Less than 3.5% (composite input)  
Less than 2% (component, S-Video  
input)  
VTR  
Audio mixer  
Cables  
DSR-2000/2000P, DNW-75/75P  
SRP-V200R  
RCC-5G/10G/30G 9-pin remote  
control cables  
Differential phase  
Less than 2.5º (composite input)  
Less than 1.0º (component,  
S-Video input)  
Frequency response  
0 to 5 MHz + 0.5 dB/–1 dB  
A-64  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Glossary  
Glossary  
A-roll edit  
Chroma key  
Editing control unit  
Key clip  
Mix  
Snapshot  
Key effect in which a particular  
color (usually a highly saturated  
blue) is used to cut holes in a  
background picture.  
A video editor with functions for  
remote control of VTRs, video  
switchers, audio switchers, and  
other video editing equipment.  
In luminance keys, to specify a  
reference luminance level. The  
part of the signal above the  
reference level is used as the key  
source signal. See also “key  
source”.  
Effect in which one signal fades in  
while another fades out. Also  
called dissolve.  
Data containing the settings of  
specific controls on the control  
panel. Snapshots can be saved and  
recalled to restore the control panel  
to a desired state.  
An edit using one player and one  
recorder for basic cut editing.  
A/B roll edit  
An edit using two players and one  
recorder, to permit special effects  
such as mix and wipe.  
Pre-read editing  
Color bar  
Field  
A/B roll editing using the output  
(playback) of the recorder VTR  
and a player VTR.  
A test signal displayed on a  
monitor screen as vertical stripes  
of different colors, used to adjust  
hue and saturation.  
In the NTSC color television  
system, 262.5 horizontal scanning  
lines. Odd lines are scanned for the  
first field before returning to the  
top of the screen to scan even  
lines. A frame is composed of two  
fields: the odd and even fields.  
Subcarrier (SC)  
The part of a video signal that  
carries color information. The  
amplitude represents saturation,  
and the relative phase against the  
color burst signal represents hue.  
Also called the color subcarrier.  
Key fill  
A signal used to fill the hole cut  
with the key source signal.  
B–Y signal  
A color difference signal. The blue  
signal minus the Y signal.  
Preroll  
Running a videotape a certain  
distance before the edit IN point in  
order to bring the tape to a steady  
speed and synchronize it with  
other tapes.  
Color matte  
Key frame  
Background picture  
An internally generated color  
signal with adjustable hue,  
saturation, and luminance.  
User program effect data which  
defines the effect at a specific  
point. User program effects are  
made up of sequentially executed  
key frames.  
In animation effects, the picture  
into which the foreground picture  
is inserted. In transition effects, the  
picture that is replaced as the effect  
progresses (FROM picture). The  
picture selected with the  
Foreground picture  
Title key  
In animation effects, the picture  
inserted into the background  
picture. In transition effects, the  
picture left on the screen after the  
effect finishes (TO picture). The  
picture selected with the  
Effect used to superimpose  
foreground characters or graphics  
on a background. Requires a key  
source signal to define the outlines  
of the characters or graphics, and a  
key fill signal to fill the outlines.  
See also “downstream key”.  
Component signal  
Postroll  
Video signal containing separate  
luminance (Y) and color difference  
(R–Y, B–Y) video components.  
Running a videotape a certain  
distance past the edit OUT point in  
order to monitor the video that  
follows.  
Key gain  
BACKGROUND bus buttons.  
The sensitivity of circuits, which  
can be adjusted with the switcher’s  
key gain control. This is done to  
obtain the desired blurring of key  
edges.  
Background through mode  
In the DFS-700/700P, an output  
mode in which the video input of  
the background bus and the video  
input of the foreground bus are  
mixed for output. Normally the  
two pictures are delayed by 1  
frame, but in pre-read editing the  
background bus picture is delayed  
by 4 lines. Pre-read editing is  
enabled by inserting the input of  
the background bus into the output  
of the recorder VTR. In this state,  
the foreground bus input delay  
becomes 1 frame + 4 lines.  
Composite signal  
Video signal containing video,  
color burst, and sync signals.  
FOREGROUND bus buttons.  
R–Y signal  
A color difference signal. The red  
signal minus the Y signal.  
Frame  
Transition  
Two fields, containing all the  
information in a complete picture.  
A period during which one picture  
is replaced by another, or a period  
during which a key is inserted or  
deleted.  
Cross-point  
Key invert  
An electronic switch where video  
signal lines cross. When the switch  
is closed, usually by pressing a  
button, multiple input signals and  
one or more output signals are  
allowed to pass.  
In luminance key, to reverse the  
polarity of a key source signal so  
that the hole is cut with the darker  
part of the signal.  
RGB signal  
Frame synchronizer  
A device used to bring the timing  
of unsynchronized video into  
conformance with a local reference  
signal.  
A signal format in which red,  
green, and blue signals are  
transmitted separately. A separate  
sync signal may be sent, or the  
sync signal can be added to the  
green signal. The DFS-700/700P  
uses the latter method.  
Wipe  
A transition effect in which one  
picture moves in to replace  
another. Often the new picture  
appears as a geometrical shape  
such as a circle or star.  
Key mask  
To hide part of a title key or  
downstream key signal so that only  
the desired part is used.  
Cut  
Gen-lock  
To synchronize output signals to  
an external sync signal.  
An instantaneous switch from one  
picture to another, or the  
instantaneous insertion or deletion  
of a key signal.  
Saturation  
Key source  
The extent to which a color has  
been diluted by white. Pure red is  
fully saturated, while pink is  
diluted.  
YUV signal  
Therefore, the VTR output that is  
inserted into the foreground bus  
must be read ahead by 1 frame.  
GPI  
A signal used to cut a hole in a  
background picture for insertion of  
a key fill signal.  
An analog component signal,  
consisting of a luminance (Y)  
signal, a color difference signal U  
(B–Y) and a color difference signal  
V (R–Y).  
Abbreviation of general purpose  
interface. An interface used to  
carry out remote control from  
editing control units lacking a  
formal interface.  
Downstream key (DSK)  
Effect used to superimpose  
Black burst  
A sync signal composed of  
composite sync and burst signals.  
characters or graphics over output  
signals. Called downstream key  
because superimposing takes place  
in the final stages of processing  
after other effects have been  
applied. Requires a key source  
signal to define the outlines of the  
characters or graphics, and a key  
fill signal to fill the outlines. See  
also “title key”.  
Luminance key  
SDI  
Key effect in which a luminance  
signal is used to define the outlines  
of characters or graphics.  
A serial component digital signal.  
Hue  
S-video signal  
Bus  
The attribute of colors that allows  
them to be classified as red, green,  
blue, and so on. Red and pink have  
the same hue, but different  
saturations.  
A video signal with separate  
luminance (Y) and chrominance  
(C) components. As opposed to  
composite video, S-video provides  
higher quality by eliminating  
interference between the Y and C  
signals.  
An internal signal path. Signals  
selected for input to the bus are  
passed on to the next process.  
Luminance signal  
The part of a video signal that  
carries brightness information.  
Also called the Y signal.  
Chroma  
In colors, hue and saturation.  
A-66  
Appendixes  
Appendixes  
A-67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Connections 6-1  
A/B roll editing system 6-5  
basic system 6-2  
key signal 6-2  
preread editing 6-4  
DSK PVW button 2-6  
DSK section 2-6, 2-8  
A
A/B roll editing  
BVE-600 5-6  
E
BVE-900/2000 series 5-8  
GPI signals 5-12  
PVE-500 5-3  
Control from editing control units 5-1  
Control knobs 2-10  
EDGE section 2-8  
EDIT button 2-11, 4-11  
EDIT display 2-11, 4-11  
Editing user program effects 4-12  
connections 6-5  
Control panel 2-1  
AC IN connector 2-15  
delegation section 2-1, 2-2  
EDITOR button 2-1, 2-7  
effect control section 2-2, 2-10  
effect transition section 2-2, 2-4  
fade-to-black and DSK section 2-1,  
2-6  
Advanced operations 4-1  
Angle 3-42  
Editing control unit  
BVE-600 5-5  
BVE-900/2000 series 5-8  
control using GPI signals 5-11  
preread editing 5-14  
PVE-500 5-1  
Animation type effects 3-17, A-21  
AUTO TRANS button 2-4, 3-54  
AUXILIARY buttons 2-2, 3-16  
GPI button 2-1, 2-7  
location section 2-1, 2-12  
pattern/numeric keypad 2-1, 2-5  
primary cross-point bus section 2-1,  
2-3  
snapshot section 2-1, 2-11  
menu control section 2-2, 2-7  
25-pin connector 2-1, 2-12  
user program section 2-2, 2-11  
EDITOR connector 2-14  
EDITOR button 2-1, 2-7  
EFFECT button 2-4  
B
BACKGROUND bus button 2-3, 3-13  
Background image 3-12  
EFFECT indicator 2-4, 3-51  
Basic operation 3-1  
Effects  
control section 2-1, 2-10  
control parameter list A-5  
example 3-18  
executing 3-54  
motion types A-21  
pattern image list A-29  
pattern variant forms and decorations  
A-22  
transition section 2-1, 2-4  
type list A-3  
types 3-17  
selection, using pattern buttons 3-23  
selection, using pattern numbers 3-24  
BEVELD EDGE button 2-8, 3-27  
BKDF-701/702/702P/711/712 1-3  
CRK button 2-7, 3-38  
CROP 3-27  
BLACK BURST OUT 1, 2, 3 connectors  
2-15  
CUT button 2-4  
BLACK button 2-2, 2-3  
BORDER button  
D
DSK section 2-8, 3-48  
EDGE section 2-8, 3-26  
DEL button 2-6  
Delegation buttons 2-2, 3-16  
Delegation section 2-1, 2-2  
Boundary, modification 3-26  
Button labels A-63  
Demonstration  
factory setting 3-8  
snapshot 4-23  
BVE-600 5-5  
BVE-900/910/2000 5-8  
ENTER button 2-6  
External key mode 3-46  
Example effects 3-18  
Example operation (1) 3-2  
Example operation (2) 3-5  
Density function 3-43  
C
DIRECT PATTERN button 2-5, 3-23  
DIRECT RECALL button 2-5, 4-23  
CCR button  
delegation section 2-2, 3-59  
menu control section 2-9, 3-59  
Direct pattern selection 3-23  
changing assignments 4-1  
selectable effects 3-17  
Changing direct pattern assignments 4-1  
F
Display window mode indicators 2-4  
DME switcher introduction 3-1  
DOWN button 2-6  
Characters and graphics, inserting  
downstream key 3-45  
title key 3-33  
Fader lever 2-5, 3-54  
Fader lever stiffness adjusting screw 2-5  
Fade to black 3-63  
Chroma keying 3-36  
auto 3-37  
Downstream key 3-45  
border 3-48  
masking 3-50  
Fade-to-black and DSK section 2-1, 2-6  
FADE TO BLACK button 2-6  
Features 1-1  
manual 3-40  
CLEAN OUT connector 2-14  
Color background 3-14  
on and off using GPI signals 5-13  
Downstream keyer section 2-8  
Drop border 3-49  
FOREGROUND bus button 2-3, 3-13  
Foreground image 3-12  
Color cancel function 3-42  
Color correction 3-59  
DSK button 2-7, 3-47  
FRAME button 2-2, 3-60  
Frame memory buttons 2-2, 3-61  
FREEZ button 2-2, 3-61  
Color matte adjustment 3-57  
DSK FILL button 2-2, 3-47  
DSK indicator 2-4, 3-51  
DSK KEY IN connectors 2-15  
FRGD 2 button 2-2, 3-16  
Index  
I-1  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Front panel 2-13  
PATTERN ADJ button 2-10  
Specifications A-64  
L
FTB indicator 2-4, 3-51  
F1 to F5 buttons 2-10  
PATTERN/KEY PAD buttons 2-6, 4-1  
STATUS display 2-11, 4-10  
SUPER BG button 2-2, 3-16  
LAST X/INS 2-6  
PATTERN NUMBER display window  
2-5, 3-24  
LEARN button 2-11, 4-21  
LIGHTING button 2-9  
Linear effects 4-4  
Pattern number specification mode 3-23  
Pattern/numeric keypad 2-1, 2-5  
PGM OUT connectors 2-14  
T
G
TALLY connector 2-14  
Location and function of parts  
and controls 2-1  
Glossary A-66  
TERMINAL connector 2-14  
3D mapping effect option 1-3  
TITLE button 2-4, 3-34  
Picture-in-picture 3-5  
GPI signals 5-11  
LOCATION button 2-12, 3-29  
Location section 2-1, 2-12  
Power switch and indicator 2-13  
GPI button 2-1, 2-7  
GPI/T 1 and 2 connectors 2-15  
Preread editing 5-14  
connections 6-4  
LUM button  
Title key 3-33  
DSK section 2-8, 3-46  
TITLE section 2-7, 3-35  
chroma key 3-36  
luminance key 3-33  
masking 3-44  
Primary cross-point bus section 2-1, 2-3  
Primary inputs and signal formats 6-9  
Processor unit 2-13  
H
Luminance key 3-33  
TITLE section 2-7, 3-35  
HOLD INPUT button 2-12, 4-22  
PVE-500 5-1  
TITLE 1 SOURCE/TITLE 2 SOURCE  
button 2-2, 3-16  
M
PVW connector 2-15  
I
TRAIL SHADOW button 2-8  
MASK button  
DSK section 2-8, 3-50  
TITLE section 2-8, 3-45  
TRANS RATE display window 2-4, 3-51  
R
Images  
auxiliary bus 3-16  
background 3-12  
foreground 3-12  
Transition  
Rear panel 2-13  
Masking  
downstream key 3-50  
title key 3-44  
direction 3-52, 3-56  
indicator 2-5, 3-56  
time 3-51  
RECALL button 2-11, 4-22  
REF. VIDEO IN connectors 2-15  
REV button 2-5, 3-52  
INITIAL button 2-10  
MATTES button 2-9, 3-57  
MEMORY button 2-2, 2-3, 3-16  
Menu control section 2-1, 2-7  
Menu display 2-10  
Transition type effects 3-17, A-21  
25-pin connector 2-1, 2-12  
Types of effect 3-17  
Initializing  
assignment of direct pattern 4-2  
menu settings 2-10  
snapshot 4-24  
user program 4-19  
user settings 6-10  
S
Saturation 3-57  
Menus 3-10  
U
Self-keying mode 3-46  
Sequence of operations 3-1  
MIX button 2-4  
INT VIDEO button 2-2, 2-3  
UP button 2-6  
Modifying  
edge 3-26  
pattern 3-28  
Inverting polarity  
downstream key 3-48  
title key 3-35  
User settings 6-10  
SET button  
effect transition section 2-4, 3-51  
pattern/numeric keypad 1 2-5, 3-24  
User modifiable effects 3-31  
User program effects  
constructing 4-3  
creating 4-10  
SET UP button 2-9, 6-7  
N
J
Setup menu  
deleting 4-19  
editing 4-12  
executing 4-18  
modification parameters 4-5  
type 4-4  
Nonlinear effects 4-4  
N/R button 2-5, 3-52  
system setup 6-7  
system information display 6-8  
input video 6-8  
organization 6-7  
output video 6-9  
Joystick 2-12  
K
O
Key fill signal  
downstream key 3-47  
title key 3-35  
control panel 6-10  
User program section 2-1, 2-11  
Option board 1-3  
Overview 1-1  
initializing user settings 6-10  
loading user settings 6-10  
saving user settings 6-10  
V
Key frame 4-3  
adding 4-14  
assigning to a numeric button 4-16  
copying 4-17  
deleting 4-15  
SHIFT button 2-9  
VIDEO INPUT connectors 2-14  
P, Q  
SNAP SHOT number display 2-11, 4-21  
P IN P/RST button 2-6  
PAGE button 2-10  
Snapshots 4-20  
demonstration 4-23  
reinitializing 4-24  
recalling 4-22  
saving 4-21  
section 2-1, 2-11  
W, X,Y  
Keypad 2-1, 2-5  
PANEL connector 2-14  
Warning messages A-1  
Wipe 3-2  
Key signal connections 6-3  
Key source signal 3-45  
Pattern  
changing position and size 3-28  
entering pattern number 3-23  
image list A-29  
SOFT button 2-8, 3-27  
Soft edge 3-26  
Z
modifying 3-31  
Z knob 2-12, 3-30  
I-2  
Index  
Index  
I-3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printed in Japan  
Sony Corporation  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Sennheiser Satellite Radio SER 1 3 User Manual
Sharp Calculator EL 9900 User Manual
Sharp Computer Monitor PN R903 User Manual
Shindaiwa Edger 81645 User Manual
Sony Camera Lens VCL DEH07V User Manual
Sony Cell Phone Z3v User Manual
Sony Headphones MDR DS4000 User Manual
Subaru Automobile 2010 Forester User Manual
Superior Indoor Fireplace sddv 35 40 User Manual
Suunto Scuba Diving Equipment SS019098000 User Manual